JP6507129B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that strikes a gaming ball on a game board surface.

  As a conventional gaming machine, a message prompting a predetermined operation such as a long press operation on an operation button (a continuous press operation for a predetermined time or more) is displayed to the player while the special symbol is fluctuating or during execution of the special game. There is one in which a predetermined effect is executed by the player performing a predetermined operation such as a long press operation on the operation button during the operation reception valid period of the above.

JP, 2010-172637, A JP 2014-117351 A

  In a conventional gaming machine which performs a predetermined effect after performing such predetermined operation such as a long press operation, it is required that the player can enjoy more by operating the operation button.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a highly entertaining gaming machine that allows the player to perform predetermined operations such as long press operation on the operation means such as operation buttons, and the player can enjoy more by operating the operation means. The purpose is

In order to achieve the above object, the invention according to claim 1 is
A main control unit that controls the progress of the game and transmits a command according to the progress of the game;
An effect control unit that determines an effect based on a command transmitted from the main control unit and causes the effect device to execute the determined effect;
Operation means capable of being operated by the player and detecting an operation situation regarding the operation by the player ;
Met gaming machine Ru and an operation control means for processing the operating condition detected from the operation means as the operation information,
The effect control unit
And a processing means for processing the operation information in association with an operation time when the operation information indicates that the operation means is operated by the player.
An edge storage unit that stores, as the operation information, at least information indicating whether the operation unit has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, and an on signal that stores information associated with the time during which the operation unit is continuously operated It has a count number storage unit,
Within a predetermined period determined based on the effect, the operation information indicates a first operation in which the operation means is operated continuously for a predetermined time or more, and continuously for less than the predetermined time At least it can be determined that the operating means is indicative of a second operation to be operated,
A second operation that determines whether or not the first operation acceptance valid period is within the predetermined period, and whether or not the second operation is performed. The operation information in the edge storage unit and in the on signal count number storage unit can be updated at each sampling timing with a constant interval regardless of whether it is within the acceptance valid period,
If it is determined that the operation information indicates the first operation within the first operation acceptance valid period, it is rendered that the first operation is performed,
Even if the operation information indicates the first operation at the start of the second operation acceptance valid period, the first operation is performed and the second operation is performed It is a game machine characterized by not performing any effect made .

  Here, in the present invention, the “operation means” includes at least an operation button, a lever, a handle, a grip, a rotation member, a slide member, a touch panel, and an optical sensor. In addition, the “operation” with respect to the operation means means that the player presses (pushes), pulls, tilts (rotates), rotates, slides, touches the hand, holds the hand, etc. by the player. It includes various operations according to the configuration of the means.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the player can perform a predetermined operation such as a long press operation on the operation unit such as the operation button, and the player can enjoy more enjoyability by the operation on the operation unit. A game machine can be provided.

It is a front view showing an example of a game machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control mechanism of the game machine attached to the back side of a game board. It is the block diagram which showed typically the main function structure in the main control board. It is a figure showing an example of transition of the game state in a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main operation | movement in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of 1st starting opening switch processing and 2nd starting opening switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the details of gate switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of special symbol processing. It is a flow chart which shows the details of special game decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a process during a stop. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a special winning opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of a special winning opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of normal symbol processing. It is a flow chart which shows the details of electric Chu (electric tulip) processing. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an output process. It is the block diagram which showed typically the main function structure in a production control board. It is a figure which shows the waveform example of the signal output from an operation button, and an example of the processing content of the signal sampled in timer interruption processing, and a result. It is a figure which shows an example of a presentation pattern selection table. It is a timing chart of the 1st scenario production pattern defined in the scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the 1st step presentation (a title display and a 1st step scenario progress presentation) based on a 1st scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows the concept of the process in a 1st step scenario progress presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a waveform of the operation signal output from the operation button in the single-pushing operation reception effective period in a 1st step scenario progress production period. It is a figure which shows one aspect | mode of the suggestion production based on a 1st scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation pattern with respect to the operation button in suggestion production, and serif production. It is a figure which shows the example of a waveform of the operation signal output from the operation button in the single hit operation reception effective period in a suggestion production period. It is a figure which shows one mode of the 2nd step scenario progress presentation in the 2nd stage production based on the 1st scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the success production | presentation in a 2nd step production | presentation. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the production | presentation with which revival production is performed after the failure production | presentation in a 2nd step production, and failure production | presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a waveform of the operation signal output from the operation button in the long press operation reception effective period in a 2nd step production period. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st scenario progress production control processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern. It is a flow chart which shows the details of the 1st step production control processing of the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the details of the 1st step scenario production advance processing of the 1st step production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the details of the 1st step scenario production advance processing of the 1st step production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the 1st step scenario production system progress rule of a 1st step production control process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the 1st step scenario production advance processing of the 1st step production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the 1st step scenario progress presentation control processing based on a 1st scenario production pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion production control processing in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the serif production execution processing in suggestion production advance processing. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 2nd step production control processing of the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern A in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern A in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the final result alert production execution process in a 2nd step production control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern B in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern C in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern D in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern D in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern E in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern E in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern F in the 1st scenario progress production control processing. It is a timing chart of the 2nd nario effect pattern defined in the scenario effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the scenario progress presentation based on a 2nd scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows the concept of the process in the 1st step production based on a 2nd scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows the title display based on a 2nd scenario production pattern, and one aspect | mode of 1st stage production (title display and 1st stage scenario progress presentation). It is a figure which shows one aspect | mode of the suggestion production based on a 2nd scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows one aspect | mode of the suggestion production based on a 2nd scenario production pattern. It is a figure which shows one aspect | mode of the suggestion production based on a 2nd scenario production pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship of the gauge progress degree and the degree of expectation in suggestion production, (b) is a figure which shows the display color of the amount of power storage in suggestion production, and the relation of expectation. It is a figure which shows an example of a gauge advancing pattern decision table (there is transition to special game state). It is a figure showing an example of a gauge progress pattern decision table (there is no shift to a special game state). It is a figure showing one mode of the 2nd step production based on the 2nd scenario production pattern, the success production, and the failure production. It is a flow chart which shows the details of the 2nd scenario progress production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the details of the 1st step production control processing of the 2nd scenario progress production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the details of the 1st step scenario production advance processing of the 1st step production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the details of the 1st step scenario production advance processing of the 1st step production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion production control processing in the 2nd scenario progress production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of operation of the operation button in the long press operation reception effective period which concerns on suggestion production advance processing, and the production | presentation screen according to this. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a figure for demonstrating a last-minute determination timing. It is a figure which shows an example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of operation of the operation button in the long press operation reception effective period which concerns on suggestion production advance processing, and the production | presentation screen according to this. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 2nd step production control processing of the 2nd scenario progress production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of operation of the operation button in the long press operation reception effective period which concerns on suggestion production advance processing, and the production | presentation screen according to this. It is a flowchart which shows the further another example of the suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the further another example of the suggestion production advance processing in suggestion production control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of operation of the operation button in the long press operation reception effective period which concerns on suggestion production advance processing, and the production | presentation screen according to this.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, the members common to each other are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will not be repeated.

全体 Overall composition of the gaming machine ◇
FIG. 1 is a front view showing an example of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. The gaming machine 1 is a ball-and-ball type gaming machine configured to pay out a prize ball when the game ball launched by the instruction operation of the player enters the winning opening provided in various winning devices. Further, the gaming machine 1 is configured to determine whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that the gaming ball launched by the instruction operation by the player enters the predetermined area, and This is a gaming machine in which an auxiliary game is performed to assist the game ball to easily enter the predetermined area under predetermined conditions in order to enhance the interest of the game. Hereinafter, such a gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 has a gaming machine main body 1a fixed to an island facility or the like in a hall (store), and the transparent glass plate 2 is fitted on the front side of the gaming machine main body 1a. It has a front frame door 3. The gaming machine main body 1 a is provided with a gaming board 10 for rolling the gaming ball inside the front frame door 3.

  The front frame door 3 is pivotally supported at the left end portion of the gaming machine main body 1a, and can be opened and closed on the front side of the gaming machine main body 1a. The transparent glass plate 2 is for making the game board 10 attached to the inside of the gaming machine body 1a visible in a state where the front frame door 3 closes the front side of the gaming machine body 1a. At the center of the lower part of the front frame door 3, a shelf-shaped ball storage part 4 projecting to the front side is provided. An operation button 6 operable by the player is provided on the upper surface of the ball storage unit 4, and a storage tray for storing game balls for launching onto the game board 10 is provided.

  The operation button 6 includes a movable body 6a and an operation button switch 6b (see FIG. 2). The movable body 6a is a portion operated by the player, and is fixed to the upper surface of the ball storage portion 4 in an energized state so as to be able to move up and down. That is, the movable body 6a is at a fixed position when the player does not perform an operation, and moves by being operated by the player. On the other hand, when the player's operation on the movable body 6a is canceled, the movable body 6a returns to the home position. The operation button switch 6b outputs a signal according to the position of the movable body 6a. The operation button switch 6b is, for example, an optical sensor, and outputs a high level signal indicating a switch-on state by operating the movable body 6a, and the switch when the movable body 6a is in a fixed position without being operated. It outputs a low level signal indicating an off state. The operation signal SGN such as the switch on signal and the switch off signal is sent to the effect control board 33.

  Further, the front frame door 3 is provided at the lower right portion of the ball storage portion 4 with a handle lever 5 which can be rotated in the clockwise direction for the player to fire the game ball. Furthermore, the front frame door 3 is provided with a frame lamp 9 disposed so as to surround the periphery of the transparent glass plate 2 and on the left and right sides of the frame lamp 9 located above the transparent glass plate 2 along with the progress of the game. A speaker 8 is provided which performs audio output for various effects.

  When the front frame door 3 is closed, the game board 10 forms a game area where the game ball can roll between the board and the transparent glass plate 2 fitted in the front frame door 3. When the handle lever 5 is operated by the player, the game ball is struck to the upper left of the game area with a hitting force according to the operation angle, and then the game ball flows down while rolling the game area. Then, when the game balls reach the various winning openings provided on the game board 10, the gaming machine 1 pays out the prize balls to the storage dishes of the ball storage unit 4.

  In the center of the game board 10, there is provided a center character 11 for performing various effects as the game progresses. The center character 11 is provided with an image display 12 such as a color liquid crystal display disposed so as to be positioned substantially at the center of the game board 10. The image display 12 displays an image for main effect when a game effect is performed in the gaming machine 1. Further, the center character 11 is provided with a movable character 14 at the upper part of the image display 12. The movable character 14 is a character (gimmick) operable when a predetermined effect is performed in the gaming machine 1. The movable character 14 has, for example, the characters "ABC" and various other decorations on its surface side, and incorporates a plurality of LEDs emitting light of different colors inside thereof. That is, the movable character 14 is configured to include the panel lamp 14a that can emit light in a variety of colors, such as a decorative part such as the characters "ABC". Furthermore, the center part 11 has a sub-display 13 smaller in display screen size than the image display 12 below the image display 12. The sub display 13 is, for example, a color liquid crystal display or the like as the image display 12. The sub display 13 displays a secondary effect image associated with the image for effect displayed on the image display 12 when a game effect is performed in the gaming machine 1 or the image display 12 The independent effect image which is not related to the image for the effect displayed by is displayed. The sub display 13 can also display an image for main effect in place of the image display 12.

  In addition, the game board 10 has a large number of nails, a windmill, etc., around the center character 11, the first start port 15, the second start port 16, the first large winning hole 17, the second large winning hole 18, and The known members such as the gate 20 and the out port 21 are provided. In addition to this, the game board 10 is also provided with a normal winning opening and the like (not shown). Furthermore, the game board 10 displays the special symbol according to the judgment result of the special game judgment (big hit judgment) by performing the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the board lower left part outside the game area where the game ball rolls. The first start port 15 and the second start port 16 display the number of holdings due to the game ball winning or display the lottery result of the normal symbol by the game ball passing through the through gate 20 A symbol display 22 is provided.

  In the game board 10 shown in FIG. 1, the through gate 20 is provided on the right side of the center character 11. The through gate 20 is a gate which is a condition under which the normal symbol lottery is performed in the gaming machine 1, and when the gaming ball passes through the gate, the normal symbol lottery is performed in the gaming machine 1.

  The first starting opening 15 is provided at the lower position of the center part 11, and the second starting opening 16 is provided on the right side of the first starting opening 15. Here, the game ball having a relatively high possibility of winning in the first start opening 15 is a game ball in which the game ball hit on the game board 10 rolls on the left side of the center character 11 as shown by the arrow F1. It is. That is, as shown by the arrow F2, the first starting opening 15 is provided so that the game ball rolling on the right side of the center combination 11 has a very low possibility of winning the first starting opening 15. The game ball having a relatively high probability of winning in the second starting opening 16 is a game ball in which the game ball hit on the game board 10 rolls on the right side of the center character 11 as shown by the arrow F2. . That is, as shown by the arrow F1, the second starting opening 16 is provided so that the game ball rolling on the left side of the center combination 11 has a very low possibility of winning in the second starting opening 16.

  Each of the first starting opening 15 and the second starting opening 16 is a winning opening for paying out a predetermined number of winning balls, and a special game whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player in the gaming machine 1 It is a winning opening that is a condition under which game determination (big hit determination) is performed. When a game ball winning a prize in these start openings 15 and 16 passes a start detection area (not shown) and a start condition is satisfied, a special game determination is made in the gaming machine 1. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine 1, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the symbol display 22, and the effect according to the result of the special game determination is started also in the center role 11 or the like. For example, in the image display 12, a symbol variation effect is started in which the three decorative symbols 12a, 12b, 12c are varied in the vertical direction or in the lateral direction. Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol on the symbol display 22 and the symbol variation production in the center character 11 end, and the result of the special game determination for the player Is displayed. If the result of the special game determination displayed at this time indicates that a predetermined winning such as a big hit has been won, then the gaming machine 1 starts a special game advantageous to the player.

  The symbol display 22 is disposed at a corner of the game board 10 and provided at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and when the variation display of the special symbol is ended and the result of the special game determination is displayed, the jackpot It is displayed in a display manner that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the player is a hit. On the other hand, the image display 12 or the like displays a display mode in which the player can easily determine whether the result of the special game determination is a jackpot or the like. Therefore, the player recognizes the result of the special game determination and the like mainly by the result of the symbol variation effect performed in the center character 11 and the like. Then, the player advances the game while visually recognizing various effects performed by the center character 11.

  The 2nd starting opening 16 equips the right-and-left both sides with the electric tulip 16a opened and closed in the left-right direction like a blade. The electric tulip 16 a is an auxiliary member that assists the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 16. That is, when the electric tulip 16 a is in the open state opened in the left-right direction, it assists the game ball rolling to a position near the second start opening 16 to easily win the second start opening 16. On the other hand, when the electric tulip 16a is in the closed state in which the left and right sides of the second starting opening 16 are closed, the game ball does not function as an assisting function for assisting the winning of the second starting opening 16. It is difficult to win a prize. In such an electric tulip 16a, an opening time according to the gaming state at that time is set by winning the normal symbol lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gate 20, and from the closed state to the open state And is driven a predetermined number of times.

  The first large winning opening 17 is provided to the right of the second starting opening 16 in the gaming board 10. The first large winning opening 17 is a first variable winning device which is driven to an open state in which the game ball can win and a closed state in which the game ball can not win, and is normally in the closed state. Then, when a predetermined winning is won in the special game determination performed by the game ball being won in the first starting opening 15 or the second starting opening 16 in the gaming machine 1, a predetermined round of a special game started thereafter In this case, the first big winning opening 17 is driven to the open state, and the gaming ball can enter the first big winning opening 17. When the first big winning opening 17 is opened, the open state continues until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number of winnings are counted. Therefore, when the first big winning opening 17 is in the open state, it is possible to win the game balls to a predetermined number before the predetermined time elapses, whereby the player can win the winning balls. it can. The first special winning opening 17 driven to the open state returns to the closed state when a predetermined time has elapsed or when a predetermined number of winnings have been counted.

  However, in the round in which the first large winning opening 17 is opened, the opening time for which the opening state of the first large winning opening 17 is maintained is determined according to the type of winning in the special game determination, for example, 30 seconds There are two types, a round (long open round) set to a relatively long time, and a round (short open round) set to an extremely short time of about 0.2 seconds. Therefore, the round in which the player can earn many prize balls is a long open round, and in the case of a short open round, it is difficult to win the game ball in the first large winning opening 17 which is open. It is difficult to acquire.

  Further, the second big winning opening 18 is provided on the right side of the center character 11. The second big winning opening 18 is also a second variable winning device driven to an open state where the game ball can win a prize and a closed state where the game ball can not win a prize, and is normally in a closed state. . Then, when a predetermined winning is won in the special game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has won the first start opening 15 or the second start opening 16 in the gaming machine 1, predetermined special games to be started thereafter are determined. In the round, the second large winning opening 18 is driven to the open state, and the gaming ball can be made to be able to win the second large winning opening 18. When the second big winning opening 18 is opened, the open state continues until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number of winnings are counted. Therefore, when the second big winning opening 18 is in the open state, it is possible to win the game balls to a predetermined number before the predetermined time elapses, whereby the player can win the winning balls. it can. The second big winning opening 18 driven to the open state returns to the closed state when a predetermined time has elapsed or when a predetermined number of winnings have been counted. The game ball that has won the second large winning opening 18 is discharged to the back side of the game board 10 through the winning detection opening 19 provided in the center character 11.

  In the round where the second large winning opening 18 is opened, the opening time for maintaining the opening of the second large winning opening 18 is also set to a relatively long time of, for example, about 30 seconds, like the first large winning opening 17 There are two types of rounds (long open round) and rounds (short open round) set to an extremely short time of about 0.2 seconds. The round in which the player can earn many prize balls is a long open round, and in the case of a short open round, it is difficult to win the game ball in the open second large winning opening 18 and wins the prize balls It is difficult.

  In the special game, a round game in which any one of the first large winning opening 17 and the second large winning opening 18 as described above is selectively driven to the open state is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). Therefore, the first large winning opening 17 and the second large winning opening 18 will not be in the open state at the same time. And, the special game where the round game which opens the first large winning a prize opening 17 or the second large winning a prize opening 18 is performed a plurality of times, gives the player an opportunity to obtain more prize balls than usual. Since it is a game, it becomes a game state (special game state) which is particularly advantageous for the player.

  However, even if a round game in which the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 is opened is performed a plurality of times, all of the plurality of times may be a short open round. If the entire round is a short opening round, it is substantially difficult for the player to obtain a winning ball during the special game. Therefore, when such a special game is played, for example, the game state after the end of the special game is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player, thereby giving the player an advantageous game value. Configured

  In addition, the out port 21 is provided at the central lowermost portion of the game board 10, and is a discharge port for discharging the game ball that did not win in any of the above-described various winning ports as the out ball to the back side of the game board 10. It is.

  Next, FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control mechanism of the gaming machine 1 mounted on the back side of the gaming board 10. As shown in FIG. On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 30 for controlling the main operation of the gaming machine 1 and a sub control board 31 for controlling each part based on signals and commands output from the main control board 30 are provided. ing. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the sub control board 31 includes a payout control board 32, an effect control board 33, an image control board 34, a lamp control board 35 and the like.

  The main control board 30 has a CPU 30a, a ROM 30b, and a RAM 30c. The main control board 30 has a first start opening switch 41 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start opening 15, and a second start opening switch for detecting that the game ball has won the second start opening 16. 42, a through gate switch 43 for detecting that the game ball has passed through the through gate 20, a power chew solenoid 44 for opening and closing the electric tulip 16a, and a first big winning hole solenoid 45 for opening and closing the first big winning opening 17; The first big winning opening switch 46 which detects that the gaming ball has won in the first big winning opening 17, the second big winning opening solenoid 47 which drives the second big winning opening 18 to open and close, and the second big winning opening 18 Each of the second big winning opening switches 48 for detecting that the gaming balls have won a prize are connected. Further, a symbol display 22 is connected to the main control board 30. The symbol display 22 is provided with a special symbol display 22a for performing a variation display of a special symbol, and an ordinary symbol display 22b for performing a variation display of an ordinary symbol.

  The main control board 30 is a payout control board when each of the first starting opening switch 41, the second starting opening switch 42, the first large winning opening switch 46 and the second large winning opening switch 48 detects a winning of the gaming ball. Send a prize ball command to 32. The payout control board 32 includes a CPU 32a, a ROM 32b and a RAM 32c, and is configured to control a payout motor 32d provided on the back side of the game board 10. When a prize ball command is input from the main control board 30, A predetermined number of balls are paid out in accordance with the winning opening that has won the prize.

  Further, the main control board 30 is configured to perform a special game determination for determining whether to play a special game or a normal symbol lottery for determining whether to open the electric tulip 16a. For example, when the game ball passes through gate 20, main control board 30 performs an ordinary symbol lottery to determine whether to open or close electric tulip 16a, and based on the result of the ordinary symbol lottery, an ordinary symbol is displayed The variable display of the normal symbol in the vessel 22b is started. Then, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the main control board 30 stops the variation display of the normal symbol with the selected symbol after a predetermined time elapses, and then drives the electric chew solenoid 44 for a predetermined time or a predetermined number of times to drive the electric tulip 16a. Let it open. When the electric tulip 16a is in the open state by winning the normal symbol lottery, as described above, the game ball is likely to be won in the second starting opening 16, so the state in which the electric tulip 16a is open is for the player. It is one of the advantageous gaming states.

  Further, when the main control board 30 detects that the game ball has won the first start opening 15 or the second start opening 16 and the start condition is satisfied, the special game determination according to the winning start opening is made Then, the special symbol display 22a starts variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined time based on the result of the special game determination. Then, the main control board 30 causes the effect control board 33 to perform a symbol fluctuation effect for a predetermined time according to the result of the special game determination in accordance with the start of the variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display 22a. Send out signals, commands, etc.

  Further, when it is detected that the game ball has won the first start opening 15 or the second start opening 16 and the variation display of the special symbol is not finished at the time when it is detected, the main control board 30 has a special symbol associated with the winning. Hold the variable display of. Then, when the variable display of the previous special symbol is finished and it is time to start the next variable display, the main control board 30 digests the hold and performs the next special game determination, and the special game determination Start the variation display of the special symbol based on the result of.

  Further, when it is found that the main control board 30 has won a predetermined winning in the special game determination, after performing the variation display of the special symbol for a predetermined time, the special game according to the type of the winning is started, By selectively driving the first large winning opening solenoid 45 or the second large winning opening solenoid 47 to the open state in each round during the special game, the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 is obtained. Let it open. The main control board 30 sends a signal or a command to cause the effect control board 33 to perform special game effects corresponding to the special game as the special game starts.

  The effect control board 33 includes a CPU 33a, a ROM 33b, a RAM 33c and an RTC 33d, and the specific contents of the effect to be performed by the gaming machine 1 based on the signals and commands from the main control board 30 and the operation signal SGN from the operation button 6. And control the execution of the determined effect. That is, the effect control board 33 controls the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 to execute effects based on the determined specific effect contents. The RTC 33 d is a real time clock, and is a clock circuit capable of outputting time information indicating an accurate current date and time.

  For example, when the special game determination is performed by the main control board 30 and the variable display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time, the effect control board 33 has three decoration symbols 12a and 12b in the image display 12 for the predetermined time. , 12c to change the symbol production effect. In this symbol variation effect, for normal symbol variation effects in which the three decorative symbols 12a, 12b and 12c are simply varied in the vertical direction, and various notice effects where characters etc appear from such ordinary symbol variation effects Various effects are performed according to the result of the special game determination, such as effects to be transferred in a progressive manner. Further, to the effect control board 33, the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 is connected. The operation button switch 6b outputs a low level signal when the movable body 6a of the operation button 6 is not operated, and outputs a high level signal when the movable body 6a is operated. Such an output signal is sampled at predetermined time intervals, for example, in timer interrupt processing by the operation control unit 66 of the control board 33 described later. The operation control unit 66 can process an operation state of the operation button 6 as operation information based on an output signal from the operation button switch 6b. Then, the effect control unit 65 of the control board 33 can determine whether or not a predetermined operation such as a single hit operation, a continuous hit operation, and a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 in a predetermined predetermined period. It is. Therefore, the effect control unit 65 can also cause the effect device 36 to perform an effect according to the operation content of the operation button 6. Further, since the effect control board 33 is provided with the RTC 33 d, it is possible to switch or change the effect to be performed in the gaming machine 1 according to the current date and time.

  Further, when a special game is performed by the main control board 30, the effect control board 33 controls the execution of the special game effect according to the type of the winning in the special game determination.

  The image control board 34 includes a CPU 34a, a ROM 34b, a RAM 34c, and a VRAM 34d, and controls an image to be displayed on the image display 12 and the sub display 13 of the rendering device 36. This image control board 34 starts the symbol variation production which fluctuates three decoration symbols 12a, 12b and 12c in the image display 12 based on the instruction from the production control substrate 33 (production control unit 65), and the design Shift production to reach production or shift to various development production. The image control board 34 can also display an effect image or the like associated with such a symbol variation effect or the like on the sub display 13 or output sound from the speaker 8. The image control board 34 also displays a round of the current round during a special game based on an instruction from the effect control board 33 (effect control unit 65) or displays a special game effect image such as a moving image. .

  The VRAM 34 d in the image control board 34 is a memory for writing an image to be displayed on the image display 12. The CPU 34a repeatedly performs various processing such as background image display processing, decorative symbol display processing, character image display processing and the like on the VRAM 34d for each frame to allow the image display 12 and the sub display 13 to be performed. A background image, a decorative symbol image, a character image and the like can be displayed in a superimposed manner to allow the player to visually recognize the foremost image. Further, the image control board 34 causes the speaker 8 to generate effect sound and the like for presentation. Therefore, the image control board 34 can output, from the speaker 8, voice, music, sound effects, and the like corresponding to an image (such as a moving image) displayed on the image display 12 or the sub display 13.

  The lamp control board 35 includes a CPU 35a, a ROM 35b, and a RAM 35c, and controls the frame lamp 9 constituting the rendering device 36 and the movable part 14 (panel lamp 14a, movable part drive unit 14b). The lamp control board 35 turns on the frame lamp 9 based on an instruction from the effect control board 33, turns on the board lamp 14a in a predetermined color, or drives the movable part driving unit 14b to move the movable part 14 Or

  Each of the image display 12, the sub display 13, the speaker 8, the frame lamp 9, the panel lamp 14a and the movable part 14 as described above can be easily perceived by the player as the game in the gaming machine 1 progresses. The effect device 36 for performing various effects is configured. Although FIG. 2 exemplifies the case where each of the effect control board 33, the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 is provided as a separate board, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control board 33 and the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 may be configured as one effect control board.

制 御 Main control board 30 ◇
FIG. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the main functional configuration of the main control board 30. As shown in FIG. In the RAM 30 c of the main control board 30, a game data storage unit 60 and a reserve storage unit 61 are provided. The game data storage unit 60 stores various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a variation pattern random number, and a reach random number as game data. The various random numbers stored in the game data storage unit 60 are random numbers capable of taking values within a predetermined range, respectively, and the values are sequentially updated by a random number update unit (not shown). Therefore, the values of various random numbers are different depending on the timing at which the game data is read from the game data storage unit 60. The game data storage unit 60 also stores normal symbol random numbers and the like used for normal symbol lottery as game data. On the other hand, the hold storage unit 61 is a storage area for temporarily storing and holding the game data read from the game data storage unit 60 by the game data acquisition unit 51 up to a predetermined upper limit number.

  In the ROM 30b of the main control board 30, a special game determination table 62 and a variation pattern table 63 are stored in advance. The special game determination table 62 is a table to be referred to for performing the special game determination. The special game determination table 62 includes a first table 62a and a second table 62b. The first table 62a is a table to be referred to in the normal probability state in which the probability that it is determined to perform the special game in the special game determination is the normal probability. The second table 62b is a table to be referred to when the probability of being determined to perform the special game in the special game determination is a high probability state in which the probability is higher than the normal probability. In the first table 62a, a predetermined number of values is determined as a winning value for a large winning random number to be a large hitting, and in the second table 62b, a larger number is determined as a winning value for a large winning random number to be a large winning than the first table 62a. ing.

  The variation pattern table 63 is a table to be referred to in order to determine the variation time related to the variation display of the special symbol when the special game determination is performed on the main control board 30. The fluctuation pattern table 63 includes a plurality of tables (not shown) such as a table referred to when the jackpot random number is a predetermined hit, a table referred to when the reach random number indicates the reach, and the like. The plurality of tables included in the variation pattern table 63 are tables in which the variation time of the special symbol is associated with the variation pattern random number one to one. Therefore, by referring to the variation pattern table 63, it is possible to uniquely determine the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special game determination, the random number of the reach random number, and the like.

  In such a variation pattern table 63, if it is determined that the special game determination is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined in advance so that a relatively long time such as 90 seconds or more is determined as the variation time of the special symbol. ing. Further, when it is determined that the special game determination is a loss, a variation pattern is predetermined such that a relatively short time of, for example, less than 90 seconds is determined as the variation time of the special symbol. However, even if the result of the special game determination is a loss, if the reach random number is a value indicating that the reach effect is to be performed, the variation time of the special symbol is compared, for example, 90 seconds or more, as in the case of the jackpot. It is a fluctuation pattern that a long time is determined.

  The CPU 30a of the main control board 30 controls the state and operation of the gaming machine 1 in an integrated manner, and functions as a gaming control unit 50 for advancing the game. The game control unit 50 functions as various processing units, but FIG. 3 exemplifies a part of its functions. That is, the game control unit 50 controls the game data acquisition unit 51, the special game determination unit 52, the special symbol variation control unit 53, and the special game control unit to switch the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 or to advance the game. Act as 54

  When each of the first starting opening switch 41 and the second starting opening switch 42 detects a winning of the gaming ball, the gaming data acquisition unit 51 receives a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a fluctuation from the gaming data storage unit 60 at that timing. The game data including the pattern random number and the reach random number is acquired. When the game data acquisition unit 51 acquires game data by winning on the first start opening 15 or the second start opening 16, the game data is stored in the hold storage unit 61. The suspension storage unit 61 stores a first suspension storage unit 61 a storing gaming data acquired by winning in the first starting opening 15 and second gaming memory acquired by winning in the second starting opening 16. A reserve storage unit 61 b is provided to distinguish between gaming data acquired by winning in the first starting opening 15 and gaming data acquired by winning in the second starting opening 16, each having a predetermined upper limit For example, it is possible to store up to 4). Therefore, the game data acquisition unit 51 stores the game data acquired by the winning of the first starting opening 15 in the first holding storage unit 61a, and holds the game data acquired by the winning of the second starting opening 16 as the second. It stores in the memory | storage part 61b. In addition, when the game data of the upper limit number is already stored in each of the 1st suspension storage part 61a and the 2nd suspension storage part 61b, the game data acquisition part 51 discards the game data acquired from the game data storage part 60. And processing for storing game data is not performed.

  The special game determination unit 52 reads the game data stored in the hold storage unit 61 and in the hold state, and makes a special game determination based on the game data. That is, the special game determination unit 52 refers to the special game determination table 62 based on the jackpot random number included in the game data, and determines whether the jackpot random number matches the jackpot value of the jackpot. As described above, the special game determination table 62 has the first table and the second table, and the special game determination unit 52 selects one of the first table and the second table according to the probability state at the time of reading the game data. To determine whether the jackpot random number matches the jackpot winning value defined in the selected table. Based on such special game determination, winning or losing of the game data read from the hold storage unit 61 is determined. The first table is a table in which the probability of becoming a big hit is set to, for example, about 1/400, and the second table has a high probability of becoming a big hit than the first table, and is set to, for example, about 1/68. Table.

  The special game determination unit 52 does not read the game data from the hold storage unit 61 when the special symbol variation control unit 53 performs the variation display of the special symbol. In this case, at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol being performed by the special symbol variation control unit 53 ends and the next variation display can be performed, the special game determination unit 52 receives The next game data is read out, and a special game determination is made based on the read out game data. At this time, if the second hold storage unit 61b stores game data, the special game determination unit 52 reads out the game data and performs a special game determination. That is, the special game determination unit 52 preferentially reads out the game data stored in the second hold storage unit 61b and performs reserve processing over the game data stored in the first hold storage unit 61a. Is configured as.

  When a special game determination is made by the special game determination unit 52, the special symbol variation control unit 53 refers to the variation pattern table 63 based on the result of the special game determination, determines the variation time of the special symbol, and determines the special symbol The variable display of the special symbol performed on the display 22a is controlled. The special symbol variation control unit 53 sends a variation start command to the effect control board 33 when determining the variation time of the special symbol and starting the variation display of the special symbol. The change start command includes information on the result of the special game determination and the change time of the special symbol. Therefore, when the effect control board 33 receives the change start command sent from the special symbol change control unit 53, while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed in the special symbol display 22a, it corresponds to the result of the special game determination. Will be able to perform the

  The special game control unit 54 functions in the case where it is determined that the special game determination by the special game determination unit 52 is determined to be switched to a special game which is advantageous for the player after winning a predetermined hit. When the special game determination unit 52 determines that the special game control unit 54 has a predetermined winning, each of the first large winning opening 17 and the second large winning opening 18 in the special gaming state performed accordingly As well as determining the number of rounds to release and the release pattern, the game state after the end of the special game is determined. Then, the special game control unit 54 starts the special game. The special game control unit 54 selects each of the first large winning opening 17 and the second large winning opening 18 in each of a plurality of rounds based on the determined opening pattern along with the start of the special game. The opening special game is controlled by operating the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 to the open state during the special game.

  For example, when determining the number of rounds and the opening pattern in the special gaming state, or the gaming state after the end of the special game, the special game control unit 54 wins either of the first start opening 15 or the second start opening 16. Different tables are referred to depending on whether the acquired game data is a big hit. For example, when it is determined that the game data stored in the first suspension storage unit 61a is a big hit as a result of winning in the first start opening 15, the special game control unit 54 is stored in, for example, the ROM 30b in advance. The first starting opening table (not shown) is read out and referred to, and the number of rounds and the opening pattern are determined based on the symbol random numbers included in the game data, and the gaming state after the end of the special game is determined. Also, when it is determined that the game data stored in the second reserve storage unit 61b is a big hit with the winning of the second start opening 16, the special game control unit 54 reads the second start opening table and The number of rounds and the opening pattern are determined based on the symbol random numbers included in the game data, and the game state after the end of the special game is determined. That is, when it is determined that the special game control unit 54 is determined to be a big hit in the special game determination, it determines the game state after the end of the special game state, the determined game state after the special game state is ended It is configured to shift the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 to.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. First, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the gaming machine 1 is activated in the normal gaming state ST1. The normal gaming state ST1 is a probability that the probability that it will be determined to win the jackpot in the special game determination to perform the special game is a normal probability, and it is a gaming state in which the game is advanced with the normal probability. In the normal gaming state ST1, when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 20 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol performed in the normal symbol display 22b is a relatively long predetermined time of about 29 seconds Even when winning the normal symbol lottery, the opening time for the electric tulip 16a to open the second starting opening 16 after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time of about 0.2 seconds even when the normal symbol lottery is won. Playing state. That is, the normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state in which the possibility of the game ball winning in the second starting opening 16 is extremely low. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, the player operates the handle lever 5 to cause the game ball to hit the game area of the game board 10 to flow down the left side area of the center character 11 as shown by the arrow F1 in FIG. The game ball is adjusted to go on and the game ball is played with the aim of winning the first starting hole 15.

  When the gaming ball wins the first start hole 15 in the normal gaming state ST1 and wins a big hit (arrow A1), the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2 and a special game according to the type of the hit. I do. In this special game, a plurality of round games in which the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 is opened are performed. Therefore, the player operates the handle lever 5 while the special game is being performed in the gaming machine 1, and as shown by an arrow F2 in FIG. Adjustment is made to flow down the right side area of the bonus item 11, and a game is played aiming to win the game ball in the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18.

  When the special game is over, the special game control unit 54 shifts the subsequent game state to any one of the time reduction game state ST3 and the probability change game state ST4 (arrow A2 or arrow A5).

  When the gaming ball passes through gate 20 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, the time shortening gaming state ST3 is set to a relatively short time in which the variation time of the normal symbol performed in the normal symbol display 22b is about 3 seconds In addition, the game state where the opening time when the electric tulip 16a opens the second starting opening 16 after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to a relatively long time of about 3.5 seconds when the normal symbol lottery is won It is. Further, in the time saving game state ST3, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state ST1. However, in the time saving game state ST3, the probability that it is determined to be a big hit in the special game determination is a normal probability similar to the normal gaming state ST1, and the gaming state in which the game is advanced with the normal probability. In such a short time game state ST3, when the game ball can be passed through the through gate 20, the electric tulip 16a is opened frequently for a long time. Therefore, when transitioning to the time saving game state ST3, the player operates the handle lever 5 while the short game state ST3 continues, as shown by the arrow F2 in FIG. The game ball hitting the area is adjusted to flow down the right side area of the center character 11, and the game ball is allowed to pass through the through gate 20 while aiming to win a prize in the second starting opening 16 which is frequently opened. Play a game.

  Such a time saving game state ST3 continues, for example, until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the variation display of the special symbol is finished. When the player wins a predetermined hit such as a jackpot in the special game determination performed during the continuation of the short game state ST3, the game state shifts from the short time game state ST3 to the special game state ST2 (arrow A3), and the hit type A special game according to is played. On the other hand, if the player does not win a predetermined hit such as a jackpot in the special game determination performed a predetermined number of times in the short time game state ST3, then the game state of the gaming machine 1 returns to the normal game state ST1 (arrow A4). When the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state ST1, the electric tulip 16a is in a hard-to-open state, and the player operates the handle lever 5, as shown by arrow F1 in FIG. The game ball launched in the game area is adjusted so as to flow down the left area of the center character 11, and the game ball is returned to the state of playing the game aiming to win the first start hole 15.

  When the normal gaming state ST1 and the short time gaming state ST3 are compared, in the short time gaming state ST3, since the gaming ball frequently wins the second starting opening 16 as described above, the opportunity for the special game determination to be made is the normal gaming state ST1. You can earn more often. Therefore, the time saving game state ST3 is a game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1. Therefore, even if all round games played in the special game state ST2 before transitioning to the short time game state ST3 are all short open rounds, the player is transferred by transitioning to the time short game state ST3 after the end of the special game state ST2. A game value more advantageous than the normal game state ST1 can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state ST4, as in the short time gaming state ST3, when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 20 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol performed in the normal symbol display 22b is 3 The time is set to a relatively short time of about seconds, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the open time for the electric tulip 16a to open the second starting opening 16 after the variation display of the normal symbol is compared for about 3.5 seconds The game state is set to a long time. Further, in the probability variation gaming state ST4, as in the short time gaming state ST3, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal gaming state ST1. Furthermore, in the probability variation gaming state ST4, the probability that it is determined to be a big hit in the special game determination becomes a high probability state higher than the normal probability, it will be a gaming state to advance the game with the high probability. In such a probability change gaming state ST4, when the game ball can be passed through the through gate 20, the electric tulip 16a is opened frequently for a long time. Therefore, when shifting to the probability variation gaming state ST4, the player operates the handle lever 5 while the probability variation gaming state ST4 continues, as shown by the arrow F2 in FIG. 1, the game of the gaming board 10 The game ball hitting the area is adjusted to flow down the right side area of the center character 11, and the game ball is allowed to pass through the through gate 20 while aiming to win a prize in the second starting opening 16 which is frequently opened. Play a game.

  Such a probability variation gaming state ST4 continues until, for example, the variable display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 10000 times) ends. When the player wins a predetermined hit such as a jackpot in the special game determination performed during continuation of the probability variation gaming state ST4, the gaming status shifts from the probability variation gaming state ST4 to the special gaming status ST2 (arrow A6), and the hit type A special game according to is played. On the other hand, if the player does not win a predetermined hit such as a jackpot in the predetermined number of special game determinations performed in the probability variation gaming state ST4, then the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 returns to the normal gaming state ST1 (arrow A7). When the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state ST1, the electric tulip 16a is in a hard-to-open state, and the player operates the handle lever 5, as shown by arrow F1 in FIG. The game ball launched in the game area is adjusted so as to flow down the left area of the center character 11, and the game ball is returned to the state of playing the game aiming to win the first start hole 15.

  When the time saving game state ST3 and the definite variation gaming state ST4 are compared with each other, the probability of winning a big hit in the special game determination in the high probability gaming state ST4 is high probability as described above, the player wins the next big hit early You can get an opportunity. Therefore, the probability variation gaming state ST4 is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the time saving gaming state ST3. Therefore, even if all round games played in the special game state ST2 before transitioning to the probability game state ST4 are all short open rounds, the player is transferred by transitioning to the probability game state ST4 after the end of the special game state ST2. A game value more advantageous than the normal gaming state ST1 or the short time gaming state ST3 can be obtained.

Processing Procedure of Main Control Board 30
Next, the main operation procedure performed in the main control board 30 will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the main operation of the main control board 30. The CPU 30a of the main control board 30 performs processing based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 5 as timer interrupt processing for a predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as power on or power off. Repeat every time. When this process is started, the main control board 30 performs the random number update process (step S101), the first start port switch process (step S102), the second start port switch process (step S103), and the gate switch process (step S104). ), Various switch processing (step S105), winning ball processing (step S106), special symbol processing (step S107), special winning opening processing (step S108), normal symbol processing (step S109), electric tulip (electric chew) processing (Step S110) and the output process (step S111) are sequentially executed as a series of processes, and when the series of processes is completed, the initial value random number update process (step S112) is repeatedly executed thereafter. After that, when the time elapses and the interruption by the timer occurs again, the processes after the random number updating process (step S101) are started again. Such processing is repeated thereafter.

  In the random number updating process (step S101), processing is performed to update the values of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the variation pattern random number, and the reach random number stored in the game data storage unit 60 of the RAM 30c. In the first starting opening switch processing (step S102), the above-mentioned game data acquisition unit 51 monitors the state of the first starting opening switch 41, and the game ball winning a prize in the first starting opening 15 passes a predetermined area. As a result, when the first starting opening switch 41 is turned on, processing for acquiring game data from the game data storage unit 60 is performed. In the second starting opening switch processing (step S103), the above-mentioned game data acquisition unit 51 monitors the state of the second starting opening switch 42, and the game ball winning a prize in the second starting opening 16 passes a predetermined area. As a result, when the second start opening switch 42 is turned on, processing for acquiring game data from the game data storage unit 60 is performed. In the gate switch process (step S104), the state of the through gate switch 43 is monitored, and when the through ball switch passes through the through gate 20 and the through gate switch 43 is turned on, the normal symbol random number is used to draw a normal symbol. The process of acquiring is performed. In various switch processing (step S105), processing is performed to input signals from all the other switches (for example, a special winning opening switch etc.). In the winning ball process (step S106), the number of winnings on the various winning openings is counted, and a process of setting a winning ball command based on the counted value is performed. In the special symbol processing (step S107), the special game determination processing by the special game determination unit 52, the special symbol variation control unit 53 and the special game control unit 54, and the variation processing of the special symbol based on the result of the special game determination are performed. . In the special winning opening process (step S108), the operation in the special game for opening the first large winning opening 17 and the second large winning opening 18 is controlled. In the normal symbol processing (step S109), processing associated with the normal symbol variation display and the variation display of the normal symbol is performed. In the electric tulip processing (step S110), the opening / closing operation control of the electric tulip 16a is performed. In the output process (step S111), a process for outputting control commands, game data, and the like from the main control board 30 to the payout control board 32 and the effect control board 33 is performed. The commands and data to be output to the respective substrates are generated in each process of steps S102 to S110 and set in advance in the RAM 30c, so in this output process, the commands and data set in the RAM 30c are read out and output. Then, in the initial value random number updating process (step S112), initial values of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the variation pattern random number, and the reach random number stored in the game data storage unit 60 are updated.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the details of the first starting opening switch processing (step S102 in FIG. 5) and the second starting opening switch processing (step S103 in FIG. 5). First, as shown in FIG. 6A, in the first start opening switch process (step S102), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start opening 15 and the first start opening switch 41 has been turned on. (Step S201). Here, if the first start port switch 41 is not turned on, the first start port switch process is ended. If the first start port switch 41 is turned on, it is determined whether the number of reservations U1 stored in the first storage section 61a is less than the upper limit (step S202). In the case of the illustrated example, the upper limit value is four. Then, if the number of reservations U1 has reached the upper limit (NO in step S202), the number of reservations can not be increased any more, so the first starting opening switch processing is ended. On the other hand, when the number of reservations U1 is less than the upper limit (YES in step S202), the value of the number of reservations U1 is incremented by 1 (step S203). Then, game data due to winning in the first start port 15 is read out from the game data storage unit 60, and values of various random numbers included in the game data are stored in the first hold storage unit 61a (step S204). Depending on the value of the jackpot random number read out at this time, it is determined whether it is "jackpot" or "loss". Also, in the case of "big hit", the type of special game played as a special game and the game state after the end of the special game are determined by the value of the read symbol random number. In the case of "loss", whether or not reach effect is to be performed is determined by the value of the read reach random number. Then, the main control board 30 sets game data including the various random numbers read out as transmission game data for transmitting to the effect control board 33 (step S205). The transmission game data set at this time is provided with information indicating that the game data is acquired by winning in the first starting opening 15. Then, when the setting of the game data is completed, the first start opening switch process is ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), in the second start port switch process (step S103 in FIG. 5), the game ball is won in the second start port 16 and the second start port switch 42 is turned on. It is determined whether or not it is (step S301). Here, when the second start port switch 42 is not turned on, the second start port switch processing is ended. If the second start port switch 42 is turned on, it is determined whether the number of reservations U2 stored in the second storage unit 61b is less than the upper limit (step S302). In the case of the illustrated example, the upper limit value is four. Then, if the number of reservations U2 has reached the upper limit value (NO in step S302), the number of reservations can not be increased any more, so the second starting opening switch processing is ended. On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit (YES in step S302), the value of the number of reservations U2 is incremented by 1 (step S303). The game data stored in the second start port 16 is read from the game data storage unit 60, and the values of various random numbers included in the game data are stored in the second hold storage unit 61b (step S304). Based on the values of the various random numbers read out at this time, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, and in the case of a loss, whether or not reach effect is to be performed. Then, the main control board 30 sets game data including the various random numbers read out as transmission game data for transmitting to the effect control board 33 (step S305). The transmission game data set at this time is provided with information indicating that the game data is acquired by winning in the second starting opening 16. Then, when the setting of the game data is completed, the second start opening switch process is ended.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing details of the gate switch process (step S104 in FIG. 5). In this process, first, it is determined whether the game ball passes through gate 20 and through gate switch 43 is turned on (step S401). If the through gate switch 43 is not turned on, the gate switch process is ended. If the through gate switch 43 is turned on, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations G for normal symbol lottery is less than the upper limit value (step S402). In the case of the illustrated example, the upper limit value is four. If the number of reservations G has reached the upper limit (NO in step S402), the number of reservations can not be increased further, and the gate switch process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit (YES in step S402), the value of the number of reservations G is incremented by 1 (step S403). Then, the normal symbol random number for the lottery of the normal symbol due to the game ball passing through the through gate 20 is read out, and the random number value is stored in the RAM 30c (step S404). In addition, the success or failure of the normal symbol lottery due to the game ball having passed through gate 20 is determined by the value of the random number read out at this time.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol processing (step S107 in FIG. 5). In this process, first, it is determined whether the current state of the gaming machine 1 is a special game (step S501). If a special game is in progress, it is not possible to display a new special symbol fluctuation display until the special game is over, so the special symbol processing is ended without starting the special symbol fluctuation processing (YES in step S501). . On the other hand, when the special game is not in progress (NO in step S501), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the current state of the gaming machine 1 is displaying the variation of the special symbol (step S502). If the variation display of the special symbol is not in progress (NO in step S502), it is determined whether the number U2 of reservations is 1 or more (step S503). If the number U2 of reservations is 1 or more (YES in step S503), the main control board 30 reads the game data stored first in the second suspension storage unit 61b (step S504), and the value of the number U2 of reservations Is decremented by 1 (step S505). Then, the other pending storage areas stored in the second pending storage unit 61b are shifted in order (step S506).

  On the other hand, when the number U2 of holdings is 0 (NO in step S503), the main control board 30 determines whether the number U1 of holdings is 1 or more (step S507). If the number U1 of reservations is 1 or more (YES in step S507), the main control board 30 reads the game data stored first in the first suspension storage unit 61a (step S508), and the value of the number U1 of reservations Is decremented by 1 (step S509). Then, the other pending storage areas stored in the first pending storage unit 61a are shifted (step S510). Further, when the number U1 of reservations is 0 (NO in step S507), this means that there is no suspension based on the winning of the first starting opening 15 or the second starting opening 16 which is the starting condition of the special game determination. The process ends without starting the variation display of the special symbol.

  When the game data is read out in either step S504 or step S508, the process proceeds to the processing for the special game determination based on the read game data (steps S511 to S517). That is, the main control board 30 first determines whether the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is in the high probability state (probability changing state ST4) (step S511), and if it is the high probability state, the special game determination table The second table 62b included in 62 is selected and read (step S512), and if it is not in the high probability state, the first table 62a is selected and read (step S513). Then, the main control board 30 executes a special game determination process for determining whether to play a special game advantageous to the player (step S514). In this special game determination process (step S514), the success or failure of the big hit is determined based on the big hit random number included in the game data read in step S504 or S508, and the variation display of the special symbol is made according to the determination result. The change time to perform is determined. The details of the special game determination process will be described later.

  Main control board 30, after doing special game decision processing (step S514), corresponds to the fluctuation time which is decided with that special game decision processing The design fluctuation production which includes the fluctuation indication of decoration design 12a, 12b and 12c A change start command to be performed by the effect control board 33 is set in the RAM 30c (step S515). Then, the main control board 30 starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display 22a (step S516), and starts the measurement of the fluctuation time to continue the fluctuation display until the fluctuation time elapses (step S517).

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the special symbol is in progress in step S502 (YES in step S502), the main control board 30 determines whether or not the variation time has ended (step S518). Here, it is determined whether the variation time for which measurement has been started in step S517 with the start of variation display of the special symbol has reached the variation time determined in the special game determination process (step S514). Then, if the fluctuation time has not ended (NO in step S518), since the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued, the special symbol processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is over (YES in step S518), the main control board 30 sets, in the RAM 30c, a fluctuation stop command for stopping the symbol fluctuation effect performed by the effect control board 33. (Step S519). Then, the variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display 22a is stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special game determination (step S520), and the measured variation time is reset (step S521). Then, the main control board 30 executes a process during stop (step S522). The details of the in-stop process will be described later.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special game determination process (step S514 in FIG. 8). When this process is started, the main control board 30 makes a special game determination of whether or not the jackpot random number included in the game data is a jackpot based on the table selected in step S512 or S513 of FIG. 8 (step S541) . If the jackpot is won (YES in step S 542), the type of jackpot is determined based on the symbol random number (step S 543). When the determination of the jackpot type is performed, the case where the symbol random number to be determined is the random number read from the first hold storage unit 61a and the case where the symbol random number read from the second hold storage unit 61b is The table referenced in is different. Therefore, even if the symbol random numbers are the same, different types of jackpots may be determined depending on whether they are read from the first hold storage unit 61a and read from the second hold storage unit 61b. When the type of jackpot is determined, the main control board 30 sets a jackpot symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot as a stop symbol to be stopped after the variation display of the special symbol (step S544). Subsequently, the main control board 30 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table included in the fluctuation pattern table 63 (step S545), and determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern random number or the like (step S546). Thereafter, based on the type of jackpot determined in step S543, the main control board 30 sets in advance an opening pattern for opening the first large winning opening 17 and the second large winning opening 18 in the special gaming state occurring thereafter. You may do it.

  When the jackpot has not been won (NO in step S542), the main control board 30 sets a lost symbol based on the symbol random number as a stop symbol to be stopped after the variation display of the special symbol (step S547). Then, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST4 (step S548). If the probability variation gaming state ST4 is (YES in step S548), the main control board 30 is included in the variation pattern table 63 The variation pattern table for probability variation gaming is referred to (step S549), and the variation time of the special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern random number and the like (step S550). At this time, the main control board 30 determines reach randomness to determine whether or not to perform reach effect, and in the case of performing reach effect, further refers to the reach variation pattern table for positive variation, and the variation time of the special symbol You may decide In the probability variation gaming state ST4, the variation time of the special symbol is easily determined to be relatively shorter than that in the normal gaming state ST1, except in the case where reach effect is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is not the probability variation gaming state ST4 (NO in step S548), the main control board 30 determines whether the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state ST3 (step S551). As a result, when it is in the time saving gaming state ST3 (YES in step S551), the main control board 30 refers to the variation pattern table for time saving game included in the variation pattern table 63 (step S552). The variation time of the special symbol is determined (step S553). Also at this time, the main control board 30 determines reach randomness to determine whether or not to perform reach effect, and when performing reach effect, refers to the reach variation pattern table for time reduction and further changes the special symbol The time may be determined. In the short time game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is easily determined to be relatively shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, except in the case where the reach effect is performed.

  Further, if it is not the time saving game state ST3 (NO in step S551), the main control board 30 refers to the normal game variation pattern table included in the variation pattern table 63 (step S554), The number of reservations stored in the first suspension storage unit 61a is confirmed (step S555). Then, the variation time of the special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern random number and the number of reservations (step S556). Also at this time, the main control board 30 determines reach randomness to determine whether or not reach effect is to be performed, and when performing reach effect, the main control board 30 further refers to the reach variation pattern table for the normal game and the special symbol The variation time may be determined. In the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the special symbol is the shortest (for example, 2 seconds) if the number of reservations stored in the first suspension storage unit 61a has reached the upper limit value, except when reach effect is performed. Set to). Above, special game decision processing (step S514) ends.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the in-stop process (step S522 in FIG. 8). In this process, after the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, the game state of the gaming machine 1 is shifted to the special game state ST2, or the time saving game state ST3 or the probability change gaming state ST4 is transferred to the normal game state ST1 Is done. When the stop processing is started, the main control board 30 determines whether or not a hit such as a big hit has occurred (step S571), and if a hit occurs (YES in step S571), the type of the hit is handled. The set special game is set (step S572). Then, a special game start command is set in the RAM 30c in order to cause the effect control board 33 to produce an effect corresponding to the special game (step S573). Thereafter, the main control board 30 starts execution of the special game (step S574). Thereby, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2.

  Further, when determining that the special game is not to be generated (NO in step S571), the main control board 30 determines whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST4 (step S575). As a result, in the case of the probability variation gaming state ST4 (YES in step S575), the main control board 30 decrements the count SC, which is the remaining number of the variation display of the special symbol for continuing the probability variation gaming state ST4 S576) It is determined whether the count SC has become 0 (step S577). As a result, when the counted number SC is not 0, since the probability variation gaming state ST4 continues, the in-stop processing ends. If the count SC has become 0 (YES in step S577), the main control board 30 sets the normal gaming state ST1 as the current gaming state (step S578). As a result, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts from the probability variation gaming state ST4 to the normal gaming state ST1.

  If the current gaming state is not the probable variation gaming state ST4 (NO in step S575), it is determined whether the main control board 30 is the time saving gaming state ST3 (step S579). As a result, when it is in the time saving game state ST3 (YES in step S579), the main control board 30 decrements the count number JC, which is the remaining number of the variation display of the special symbol for continuing the time saving game state ST3 S580) It is determined whether the count number JC has become 0 (step S581). As a result, when the count number JC is not 0, since the time-saving game state ST3 continues, the processing in suspension is ended. If the count JC has become 0 (YES in step S581), the main control board 30 sets the normal gaming state ST1 as the current gaming state (step S582). As a result, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts from the short time gaming state ST3 to the normal gaming state ST1.

  When the main control board 30 determines that the current gaming state is not the short time gaming state ST3 but the normal gaming state ST1 (NO in step S579), the processing ends without performing any special processing. This is the end of the in-stop process (step S522).

  Next, FIGS. 11 and 12 are flowcharts showing the details of the special winning opening process (step S108 in FIG. 5). In this process, the opening / closing operation of the first large winning opening 17 and the second large winning opening 18 after the special game is started is controlled. The main control board 30 determines whether the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a special game (step S601). When the special game is not in progress (NO in step S601), since the opening and closing operation of the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 is not performed, the special winning opening process ends. On the other hand, when the special game is in progress (YES in step S601), the main control board 30 is in the opening operation of the special game started by the above-mentioned stop processing (step S574 in FIG. 10) of the gaming machine 1 It is determined whether there is any (step S602). When gaming machine 1 is in opening operation (YES in step S602), main control board 30 determines whether or not the time (opening time) in which the preset opening operation should be performed has passed (step S603) . When the opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S603), the opening operation is continued, and the special winning opening process is ended.

  When the opening time has elapsed (YES in step S603), main control board 30 adds 1 to the current round value R for opening first large winning opening 17 or second large winning opening 18 (step S604). The round value R is initialized to 0 at the start of the special game, and by adding 1 at step S604, it becomes the value of the round to be made this time. Then, the main control board 30 confirms the opening pattern of the special game set in advance (step S605), and the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 in the current round defined in the opening pattern Is set (step S606). Then, the main control board 30 opens one of the first large winning opening 17 and the second large winning opening 18 corresponding to the current round (step S607). When the first big winning opening 17 or the second big winning opening 18 is opened, the main control board 30 starts measuring operation of the opening time set in step S606.

  Next, the main control board 30 determines whether the opening time set in step S606 has passed after opening the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 (step S608), and the opening time is set. If has not passed (NO in step S608), it is further determined whether or not a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls have won for the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 which is open. (Step S609). As a result, when the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winnings has not reached the upper limit (NO in step S609), the open state of the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 continues. In order to do, finish the special winning opening process.

  On the other hand, when the opening time has elapsed (YES in step S608) or when the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening has reached the upper limit (YES in step S609), main control board 30 is currently open The first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 is closed (step S610). Then, it is determined whether the current round value R is a value (for example, 16) indicating the final round (step S611). If it is not the final round (NO in step S611), the special game continues, so the special winning opening process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the current round value R is a value indicating the final round (YES in step S611), the main control board 30 executes the processing of step S612 and subsequent steps for ending the special game. That is, the main control board 30 resets the current round value R to 0 (step S612), and determines whether to shift the gaming state after the end of the special game to the probability variation gaming state ST4 (step S613). When shifting to the probability variation gaming state ST4 after the end of the special game (YES in step S613), the main control board 30 sets the probability variation gaming state ST4 as the gaming status after the termination of the special game (step S614) and the probability variation gaming state ST4 is A predetermined value (for example, 10000) is set to the count number SC of the number of times of variation display of the special symbol to be continued (step S615). If the count SC to be set here is set to, for example, 10000, the probability variation gaming state ST4 will substantially continue until the next big hit. In addition, if the count number is set to a value of about 100 or less, it may be realistic to return from the probability variation gaming state ST4 to the normal gaming status ST1 without winning a jackpot in the probability variation gaming state ST4.

  If the main control board 30 determines not to shift to the probability game state ST4 after the end of the special game (NO in step S613), the time control game state ST3 is set as the game state after the end of the special game (step S616). A predetermined value (for example, 100) is set to the count number JC of the variation display number of the special symbol continued by the gaming state ST3 (step S617).

  Then, the main control board 30 starts time measurement for the ending of the special game (step S618), and determines whether the ending is ended (step S619). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the beginning of the ending, it is determined that the ending is not completed (NO in step S619), and the special winning opening process is ended. If a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the ending, it is determined that the ending has ended (YES in step S619), and a special game end command is set on the effect control board 33 to end the special game effect (step S620), the special game is ended (step S621).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S602 that the gaming machine 1 is not opening (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to the flow chart of FIG. It is determined whether 18 is open (step S651). If the release is in progress (YES in step S651), the processing in step S608 and thereafter shown in FIG. 11 is executed. If it is not in the open state (NO in step S651), it is determined whether the gaming machine 1 is in the ending of the special game (step S652). If it is in the process of ending (YES in step S652), the processes in and after step S619 shown in FIG. 11 are executed. When the ending is not in progress (NO in step S652), the elapsed time after the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 is closed has elapsed the preset interval (interval time) of each round It is determined whether or not it is (step S653). If the interval time has not elapsed (NO in step S653), it is not yet time to execute the next round, and the special winning opening process is ended. On the other hand, if the interval time has elapsed (YES in step S653), the processes in step S604 and thereafter shown in FIG. 11 are performed to execute the next round.

  When a special game is started in the gaming machine 1 by the special winning opening process as described above, the first large winning opening 17 or the second large winning opening 18 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special game. Is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). Further, when the special game ends, one of the time saving game state ST3 and the probability variation game state ST4 is set.

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the normal symbol processing (step S109 in FIG. 5). In this process, first, it is determined whether the current state of the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary game (step S701). During the auxiliary game, it means that the process for driving the electric tulip 16a to the open state is started by winning the normal symbol lottery, and the process is not yet finished. When the auxiliary game is being played (YES in step S701), the main control board 30 ends the normal symbol processing without starting the variable display of the normal symbols. When the auxiliary game is not in progress (NO in step S701), it is determined whether or not the current state of the gaming machine 1 is displaying the variation of the normal symbol (step S702). If the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (NO in step S702), the main control board 30 determines whether the number of reservations G for the normal symbol lottery is 1 or more (step S703). When the number of reservations G is 0 (NO in step S703), it means that there is no game ball passing to the through gate 20 which is the starting condition of the normal symbol lottery, so the variable display of the normal symbol is not started Finish the normal symbol processing.

  On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is 1 or more (YES in step S703), the main control board 30 reads the game data (normal symbol random number) corresponding to the first suspension (step S704), and the number of reservations G Is decremented by 1 (step S705), and the storage area storing the other suspension is shifted (step S706). Then, the main control board 30 determines whether or not the normal symbol random number read from the hold is a predetermined winning value, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (step S 707). When the normal symbol lottery is won (YES in step S707), the main control board 30 sets a symbol (per symbol) indicating that the normal symbol lottery is won in the RAM 30c (step S708). If the normal symbol lottery is not won (NO in step S707), a symbol (loss symbol) indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been missed is set in the RAM 30c (step S709).

  Then, the main control board 30 determines whether the current short game state ST3 or the probability variation game state ST4 of the gaming machine 1 is (step S710), and the short time gaming state ST3 or the probability variation game state ST4 (step S710). (YES in step S711), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (3 seconds in the case of the illustrated example) (step S711). When it is determined that the current gaming state is neither time saving gaming state ST3 nor probability variation gaming state ST4 (NO in step S710), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time (29 seconds in the example shown) (Step S712). Then, the main control board 30 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 22b of the symbol display 22 based on the fluctuation time set in step S711 or S712 (step S713), and measures the fluctuation time Is started (step S714).

  If the normal symbol variation display is in progress (YES in step S702), the main control board 30 determines whether the variation period of the normal symbol has ended (step S715). That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time for which measurement has been started in step S714 has reached the fluctuation time set in step S711 or S712. When the fluctuation time has not ended (NO in step S715), since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is continued, the normal symbol processing is ended as it is. When the fluctuation time is over (YES in step S715), the main control board 30 stops the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and displays the symbol set in step S708 or S709 (step S716). Thereafter, the measured fluctuation time is reset (step S717). Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (step S718), and if it has been won (YES in step S718), an auxiliary game for opening the electric tulip 16a is started (step S719). Thus, the current state of the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary game. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won (NO in step S718), the normal symbol processing is ended while maintaining the current state of the gaming machine 1.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the details of the electric tulip processing (step S110 (electric chew processing) of FIG. 5). In this processing, first, it is determined whether the current state of the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary game (step S801). When the auxiliary game is not in progress (NO in step S801), the electric tulip 16a is not opened, and the electric tulip processing ends. If the auxiliary game is in progress (YES in step S801), the main control board 30 determines whether the electric tulip 16a is in the open state (step S802), and if the electric tulip 16a is not in the open state ( In step S802, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving game state ST3 or the probability variation game state st4 (step S803). When the current gaming state is the short time gaming state ST3 or the probability variation gaming state ST4 (YES in step S803), the main control board 30 opens the electric tulip 16a for a long time (3.5 seconds in the example shown) (Step S804). Further, if neither the time saving gaming state ST3 nor the probability variation gaming state ST4 is a normal gaming state ST1 (NO in step S803), the main control board 30 opens the electric tulip 16a for a short time (in the example of FIG. It is set to 0.2 seconds (step S805). Then, the main control board 30 drives the electric chew solenoid 44 to open the electric tulip 16a (step S806), and starts measurement of an elapsed time after opening (step S807). On the other hand, when the electric tulip 16a is already open (YES in step S802), the processing of steps S803 to S807 is skipped. Thereafter, the main control board 30 determines whether or not the opening time set in step S804 or S805 has elapsed (step S808), and when the opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S808), the electric tulip 16a Since the open state of is continued, the electric tulip processing is finished. When the opening time has elapsed (YES in step S808), the main control board 30 drives the electric control solenoid 44 to return the electric tulip 16a to the closed state (step S809), and ends the auxiliary game to process the electric tulip End (step S810).

  By the processing shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, in the short time gaming state ST3 or the probability variation gaming state ST4, the electric tulip 16a is opened more frequently and for a long time than the normal gaming state ST1 and the second starting opening It becomes easy for the game ball to enter 16 with respect to 16.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the output process (step S111 in FIG. 5). In this process, various data and commands are output from the main control board 30 to the sub control board 31. First, when the transmission game data is set, the main control board 30 transmits it to the effect control board 33 (step S901). If the transmission game data is not set, the transmission process of step S901 is not performed. Next, if a change start command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control board 33, and it is instructed to perform a symbol change effect corresponding to the change time of the special symbol (step S902). As a result, a variable effect is caused to change the decorative symbols 12a, 12b, 12c by the effect control board 33. If the change start command is not set, the transmission process of step S902 is not performed. Next, if the change stop command is set, it is sent to the effect control board 33, and the change effect being executed by the effect control board 33 is stopped, and the result of the special game determination becomes a big hit An instruction is issued to notify the player whether or not (step S903). If the variable stop command is not set, the transmission process of step S903 is not performed. Next, if the special game start command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control board 33, and the start of the effect operation accompanying the start of the special game is instructed (step S904). The special game start command transmitted at this time includes information indicating whether the gaming state after the special game is the time saving game state ST3 or the probability variation gaming state ST4. If the special game start command is not set, the transmission process of step S904 is not performed. Next, if the special game end command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control board 33, and the end of the effect corresponding to the special game is instructed (step S905). If the special game end command is not set, the transmission process of step S905 is not performed. Next, if the normal symbol variation start command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control board 33, and it is instructed to perform the effect corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol (S906). If the normal symbol variation start command is not set, the transmission process of step S906 is not performed. Finally, if various other commands are set, they are transmitted to the effect control board 33 and the payout control board 32 to control each part (step S 907). For example, at this time, a winning ball command associated with the game balls winning in various winning openings is transmitted to the payout control board 32 and the payout control board 32 pays out the winning balls. Thus, the output process ends.

◆ Production control board 33 ◆
Next, details of the effect control board 33 will be described. FIG. 16 is a block diagram schematically showing the main functional configuration of the effect control board 33. As shown in FIG. As described above, the effect control board 33 receives various commands CMD1 from the main control board 30, and controls effects according to the commands CMD1. In addition, the effect control board 33 receives an operation signal SGN output from the operation button 6 when the operation button 6 is operated by the player, thereby providing an effect according to the operation situation of the operation button 6 by the player. It can be carried out. Hereinafter, the configuration and operation of such an effect control board 33 will be described in detail.

  As described above, the effect control board 33 includes the CPU 33a, the ROM 33b, the RAM 33c, and the RTC 33d.

  The CPU 33 a of the effect control board 33 includes an effect control unit 65 and an operation control unit 66. The effect control unit 65 functions as an effect pattern determination unit 70, a normal game effect control unit 71, and a special game effect control unit 72.

  When receiving the change start command from the main control board 30, the effect pattern determination unit 70 selects one effect pattern corresponding to the change time of the special symbol included in the change start command among the plurality of effect patterns 77. By selecting based on the table 79, an effect pattern such as a symbol variation effect to be performed in the gaming machine 1 is determined.

  The normal game effect control unit 71 and the special game effect control unit 72 control the execution of effects by the effect device 36 based on the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination unit 70.

  The normal game effect control unit 71 causes the effect device 36 to perform an effect according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the normal gaming state in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed. Specifically, the normal game effect control unit 71 performs symbol variation effects to vary the three decorative symbols 12a, 12b and 12c displayed on the display screen of the image display 12, and also from the main control board 30. In addition to the effect determined by the effect pattern determination unit 70 based on the command, an effect is provided to the sub display 13, the speaker 8, the frame lamp 9, or the movable role 14 according to the operation status of the operation button 6 in a predetermined period. Run it. Further, when the scenario effect pattern 78 is determined by the effect pattern determination unit 70, the normal game effect control unit 71 indicates the suggested effect control unit 74 in the scenario progress effect control unit 73 according to the contents of the determined scenario effect pattern 78. The first stage effect control unit 75 and the second stage effect control unit 76 are caused to function in a predetermined order and timing, respectively, to cause the effect device 36 to execute the scenario effect pattern 78.

  Further, when the result of the special game determination is a big hit, the special game effect control unit 72 of the special game effect according to the type of the winning in the special game determination after the end of the normal game effect by the normal game effect control unit 71 Control the execution.

  The operation control unit 66 processes the operation status detected from the operation button 6 as operation information, and is connected to the operation button switch 6 b of the operation button 6 and the operation signal storage unit 69 of the RAM 33 c. The operation situation is detected by the operation signal SGN output from the operation button switch 6 b of the operation button 6. The operation button switch 6b outputs a low level signal, for example, when the movable body 6a of the operation button 6 is not operated, and outputs a high level signal when the movable body 6a is operated. Therefore, the operation control unit 66 uses the output of the operation button 6 (the operation button switch 6b) as the operation information (for example, whether the operation button 6 is operated or whether the operation state for the operation button 6 continues). It becomes possible to process. Specifically, the operation control unit 66 performs predetermined timer interruption processing on the operation signal SGN input to the input port (not shown) of the effect control board 33 as a digital signal from the operation button 6 (the operation button switch 6b). Sampling every time (for example, every 2 milliseconds).

  The operation control unit 66 further refers to the operation signal SGN1 (hereinafter referred to as “the present operation signal SGN1” or “the operation signal SGN1” that is sampled this time among the operation signals SGN input to the input port (not shown) of the effect control board 33). And detecting the presence or absence of an on edge, the presence or absence of an off edge, the number of on edges, etc. as shown in FIG. 17 based on the operation signal SGN2 sampled in the previous time (hereinafter also referred to as “previous operation signal SGN2” or “operation signal SGN2”) Further, by detecting the number of on signals, etc., the operation situation can be associated with the operation time and processed as operation information. In other words, the operation control unit 66 can grasp the operation information from the operation situation on the operation button 6 by processing the operation signals SGN1 and SGN2. As a result, the effect control unit 65 can determine whether or not the operation button 6 is performing a predetermined operation such as a single hit operation, a continuous hit operation, and a long press operation as described later.

  The details of the process of the operation information by the operation control unit 66 will be described later. In FIG. 16, the operation control unit 66 is provided on the effect control board 33, but the operation control unit 66 is provided on the image control board 34 or the lamp control board 35, or the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 are provided. The operation control unit 66 may be provided on one substrate.

  In the ROM 33 b of the effect control board 33, a plurality of effect patterns 77 to be played as normal game effects are stored in advance. Each of the plurality of effect patterns 77 is an effect pattern that performs effects corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol determined by the special symbol variation control unit 53. Further, among the plurality of effect patterns, there are included a plurality of scenario effect patterns 78 having different progress contents of effects according to the operation content of the player on the operation button 6. The scenario rendering pattern 78 is defined such that a scenario in which a plurality of stages are set from the initial stage to the final stage proceeds in stages according to the presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 6 by the player or the content of the operation. Effect pattern. The plurality of scenario effect patterns 78 are all stored in the ROM 33 b as effect patterns corresponding to the same variation time of the special symbol. Further, in the ROM 33b, a presentation pattern selection table 79 for selecting one presentation pattern corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol from among the plurality of presentation patterns 77 is stored in advance.

  The RAM 33 c of the effect control board 33 includes a reception buffer 67, a transmission buffer 68, and an operation signal storage unit 69.

  The reception buffer 67 stores a command CMD1 and the like transmitted from the main control board 30. On the other hand, the transmission buffer 68 stores a command CMD2 for causing the effect device 36 such as the image display 12 and the frame lamp 9 to execute effects by the image control board 34 or the lamp control board 35. The command CMD2 is generated based on the result of analyzing the command in the reception buffer 67 by the effect control unit 66 or based on the result of processing of the operation information by the operation control unit 66. The CMD 2 stored in the transmission buffer 68 is transmitted to the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 by the effect control unit 65. Thereby, the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 cause the effect device 36 to perform an effect according to the command CMD2.

  The operation signal storage unit 69 includes a sampling signal storage unit 69a, an edge storage unit 69b, an on edge count number storage unit 69c, and an on signal count number storage unit 69d.

  The sampling signal storage unit 69a is referred to, for example, to process the operation signals SGN1 and SGN2 for detection of on edge by the operation control unit 66, detection of off edge, update of the on edge number counter, update of the on signal number counter, etc. It is a thing. The sampling signal storage unit 69a stores the current operation signal SGN1 and the previous operation signal SGN2, and has a first storage area for storing the current operation signal SGN1 and a second storage area for storing the previous operation signal SGN2. doing. In the first storage area and the second storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a, high level signals (hereinafter referred to as "on signals") corresponding to the ON state of the operation signals SGN1 and SGN2 from the operation button 6 (operation button switch 6b). In the case of (1) is written, while in the case of a low level signal (hereinafter also referred to as "off signal") corresponding to the off state, "0" is written. Specifically, when the operation control unit 66 writes “1” to the first storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a when the operation signal SGN1 is an on signal, the operation control unit 66 makes an operation when the operation signal SGN1 is an off signal. Write “0” in the first storage area of the sampling signal storage unit. On the other hand, the previous operation signal SGN2 is a sampling signal by shifting the previously sampled operation signal SGN2 stored in the first storage area of the sampling signal storage section 69a to the second storage area of the sampling signal storage section 69a. It is kept stored in the storage unit 69a. That is, in the present embodiment, at least two operation signals SGN1 and SGN2 of the current operation signal SGN1 and the previous operation signal SGN2 are stored, and the stored contents for these operation signals SGN1 and SGN2 are processed by timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 65. It will be updated one by one.

  The edge storage unit 69b stores the presence or absence of detection of on-edge and off-edge (these edges are generically referred to hereinafter simply as “edge”). Referenced when updating the. The edge storage unit 69b has a first storage area for storing that an on-edge has been detected, and a second storage area for storing that an off-edge has been detected. In the first storage area and the second storage area of the edge storage unit 69b, "1" is written when an edge is detected, while "0" is written when an edge is not detected.

  Here, the on-edge is obtained when the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, that is, when the operation button switch 6b changes from the off state to the on state. Therefore, by detecting the on-edge, it is possible to know the timing at which the operation on the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) is started and the number of times of operation on the operation button 6. In the example of FIG. 17, between sampling timing 3 and sampling timing 4, between sampling timing 7 and sampling timing 8, between sampling timing 11 and sampling timing 12, between sampling timing 13 and sampling timing 14, Between the sampling timing 15 and the sampling timing 16, between the sampling timing 18 and the sampling timing 19, and between the sampling timing 21 and the sampling timing 22, there are parts where the state of the operation button switch 6 b changes from the off state It corresponds to on-edge. Since such an on-edge is a portion where the state of the operation button switch 6b changes from the off state to the on state, in the sampling signal storage unit 69a of the RAM 33c, the previous operation signal SGN2 is stored in the second storage of the sampling signal storage unit 69a. In this case, the current operation signal SGN1 is stored as “1” in the first storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a as “0” in the area. Therefore, the operation control unit 66 refers to the contents of the first storage area and the second storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a in the RAM 33c in the timer interrupt processing, and "0" is stored in the second storage area. (1) The presence or absence of the on-edge is determined depending on whether "1" is stored in the storage area. In the example of FIG. 17, the operation control unit 66 has an on-edge at sampling timing 4, sampling timing 8, sampling timing 12, sampling timing 14, sampling timing 16, sampling timing 19 and sampling timing 22 indicated by arrows in the figure. I will judge. When the on-edge is detected, the operation control unit 66 writes “1” to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69 b, and the fact that the on-edge is detected is stored in the RAM 33 c. On the other hand, when the on-edge is not detected, the operation control unit 66 writes "0" in the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b, and it is stored in the RAM 33c that the on-edge is not detected.

  On the other hand, the off edge is obtained when the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, that is, when the operating button switch 6b changes from the on state to the off state. Therefore, by detecting the off edge, the timing when the operation on the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) is released, the number of on signals from when the on edge is detected to when the off edge is detected (continuation operation to the operation button 6 You can know the time). In the example of FIG. 17, between sampling timing 6 and sampling timing 7, between sampling timing 8 and sampling timing 9, between sampling timing 12 and sampling timing 13, between sampling timing 14 and sampling timing 15, A part where the state of the operation button switch 6b between the sampling timing 19 and the sampling timing 20 changes from the on state to the off state corresponds to an off edge. Since such an off edge is a portion where the state of the operation button switch 6b changes from the on state to the off state, the previous operation signal SGN2 is set to "1" in the second storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a, and the current operation is performed. Signal SGN1 is stored as "0" in the first storage area of sampling signal storage unit 69a. Therefore, the operation control unit 66 refers to the contents of the first storage area and the second storage area of the sampling signal storage unit 69a in the RAM 33c in the timer interrupt process, and "1" is stored in the second sampling signal storage area. Also, the presence or absence of the off edge is determined depending on whether "0" is stored in the first sampling signal storage area. In the example of FIG. 17, the CPU 33a determines that there is an off edge at sampling timing 7, sampling timing 9, sampling timing 13, sampling timing 15, sampling timing 18 and sampling timing 20 indicated by arrows in the drawing.

  The on-edge count number storage unit 69c implements an on-edge number counter, and is updated when the operation signal SGN1 is sampled by timer interruption processing by the operation control unit 66. The on-edge number counter includes, for example, the flag type on-edge number counter and the cumulative on-edge number counter shown in FIG. In the flag type on-edge number counter, “1” is written to the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c when the on-edge is detected, and when the off edge is detected, the first on-edge count number storage unit 69c 1 "0" is written to the storage area. Such a flag type on-edge number counter continues within the operation reception valid period when the effect control unit 65 determines whether or not a predetermined operation such as a long press operation has been performed within the operation reception valid period. Reference is made to determine whether or not the movable body 6a of the operation button 6 is operated, and whether or not the operation button 6 has been operated from before the operation acceptance valid period. On the other hand, in the accumulated on-edge number counter, “1” is stored in the second storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c when an on-edge is detected in the operation acceptance valid period for a predetermined operation such as a long press operation or a continuous hit operation. Is incremented by one. Such a cumulative on-edge number counter is referred to in order for the effect control unit 65 to determine whether or not a predetermined operation such as a continuous hit operation has been performed in the operation reception valid period.

  The on signal count number storage unit 69d implements an on signal number counter. The on signal number counter includes, for example, the on signal number counter between on and off edges shown in FIG. 17 and the accumulated on signal number counter. The on-off-edge on-signal number counter increments the sampling number of the on-signal in the first storage area of the on-signal count number storage unit 69d by "1" every time the on-edge is detected until the off-edge is detected. Ru. Such on / off edge on signal number counter is referred to by the effect control unit 65 in order to obtain information associated with the time during which the movable body 6 a of the operation button 6 is continuously operated. The on / off edge on signal number counter is updated based on the contents of the current operation signal SGN1 as a result of detection of on edge and off edge by the operation control unit 66 triggered by the operation control unit 66 sampling the operation signal SGN1. Ru. On the other hand, in the cumulative on signal number counter, the sampling number of the on signal (the number of signals in the switch on state) is set to the second of the on signal count number storage unit 69d regardless of the on edge and the off edge The storage area is incremented by one. Such cumulative ON signal number counter is referred to by the effect control unit 65 in order to obtain information associated with the time when the movable body 6 a of the operation button 6 is operated. The cumulative on signal number counter is updated based on the content of the operation signal SGN1 when the operation control unit 66 samples the operation signal SGN1.

  Predetermined processing such as detection of on-edge based on sampled operation signals SGN1 and SGN2, detection of off-edge, update of on-edge number counter, update of on-signal number counter, etc. It may be performed by the control unit 65.

  When the on signal number counter is updated when the effect based on the scenario rendering pattern is executed, the on signal number counter is not updated (incremented) until the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied. After that, updating (increment) of the on signal number counter may be started. When sampling the operation signal from the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6, detecting the on edge or off edge, and updating the on edge number counter or the on signal number counter, these processes are at least predetermined operations such as a long press operation. It may be performed during the operation acceptance valid period to determine whether or not the operation has been performed, and it is optional whether processing such as sampling of the operation signal is performed in a period other than the operation acceptance valid period.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the effect pattern selection table 79. As shown in FIG. The effect pattern selection table 79 is table information in which the effect pattern is associated with the variation time of the special symbol as shown in FIG. In addition, it is possible to additionally record selection time setting information in the effect pattern selection table 79.

  For example, if the effect pattern A is associated with the fluctuation time of 2 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol included in the fluctuation start command is 2 seconds, the effect pattern determination unit 70 changes the fluctuation time of 2 seconds. The effect pattern A is selected as the corresponding effect. In addition, effect patterns B, C and D are respectively associated with fluctuation time of 5 seconds, 6 seconds and 7 seconds, and fluctuation time of special symbol included in fluctuation start command is 5 seconds, 6 seconds or 7 seconds If it is, the effect pattern determination unit 70 selects the effect pattern B, C or D as the effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of 5 seconds, 6 seconds or 7 seconds. Furthermore, if the scenario effect pattern 78 is associated with the fluctuation time of 90 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol included in the fluctuation start command is 90 seconds, the effect pattern determination unit 70 changes the fluctuation time of 90 seconds. The scenario rendering pattern 78 is selected as the rendering corresponding to. The scenario effect pattern 78 includes a plurality of scenario effect patterns (first scenario effect patterns A to F and second scenario effect patterns A and B) as described later. As described above, in the effect pattern selection table 79, except for the scenario effect pattern 78, the variation time of the special symbol and the effect pattern are associated one-on-one. When one effect pattern is associated one-to-one with one variation time in the effect pattern selection table 79 (for example, in the case of effect patterns A to D), selection time setting information is not registered in the effect pattern.

  On the other hand, in the scenario effect pattern 78, the variation time of the special symbol in the effect pattern selection table 79 is associated with the same predetermined time. In the example of FIG. 18, a first scenario effect pattern 781 consisting of a first scenario effect pattern A to a first scenario effect pattern F, and a second scenario effect pattern 782 consisting of a second scenario effect pattern A and a second scenario effect pattern B. A total of eight scenario rendering patterns 78 including the above are associated with the fluctuation time of 90 seconds. The selection time setting information is registered in advance in these scenario effect patterns 78. The selection time setting information is information that is referred to select one scenario presentation pattern from among the eight scenario presentation patterns 78 when the variation time of the special symbol is a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds). It is information in which different time zones are set for each of a plurality of scenario effect patterns (the first scenario effect patterns A to F and the second scenario effect patterns A and B). Therefore, when the change time included in the change start command received from the main control board 30 is 90 seconds, the effect pattern determination unit 70 refers to the time information output from the RTC 33 d, and generates a plurality of scenario effect patterns (first One scenario presentation pattern corresponding to the current date and time is selected from the scenario presentation patterns A to F and the second scenario presentation patterns A and B), and the presentation apparatus 36 of the gaming machine 1 performs the selected scenario presentation pattern. Determined as a pattern.

  However, the effect pattern determination unit 70 is not limited to selecting one scenario effect pattern according to the current date and time output from the RTC 33 d as described above, and, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) If it is, the lottery is performed, and one scenario presentation pattern is selected from the plurality of scenario presentation patterns 78 (the first scenario presentation patterns A to F and the second scenario presentation patterns A and B) based on the lottery result. It does not matter.

  When one effect pattern to be executed is determined by the effect pattern determination unit 70, the normal game effect control unit 71 operates the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35 based on the effect pattern. And controls execution of an effect accompanying the special game determination being performed in the gaming machine 1. The normal game effect control unit 71 includes a scenario progress effect control unit 73. The scenario progress presentation control unit 73 functions when one of the plurality of scenario presentation patterns 78 is selected, and controls such that a symbol variation presentation based on the scenario presentation pattern 78 is performed. That is, the scenario progress effect control unit 73 causes the effect device 36 such as the image display 12 to perform scenario progress effect via the image control board 34 and the lamp control board 35.

  The scenario progress presentation starts from the initial stage, and the scenario progresses in stages according to the presence or absence of the single hit operation, continuous hit operation or long press operation on the operation button 6 by the player, etc., and the scenario finally reaches the final stage. It is an effect that the higher the degree of expectation that the game value is given to the player is the highest if the game progresses. For example, in the present embodiment, when the variation time of the special symbol is 90 seconds, scenario progress presentation for 90 seconds is performed. Therefore, if the result of the special game determination is a big hit and the subsequent game state is to be shifted to the special game state ST2, if the variation time of the special symbol determined in the main control board 30 is 90 seconds Finally, there are many cases where scenario progress effects are advanced to the final stage. In addition, even if the result of the special game determination is a big hit and the subsequent game state is shifted to the special game state ST2, scenario progress presentation may not be performed until the final stage. In this case, after being notified that the game has not progressed to the final stage, the resurrection effect 110 is performed, and the result of the special game determination is a big hit by the resurrection effect 110, and the subsequent gaming state shifts to the special gaming state ST2. It is informed that it is done. On the other hand, if the result of the special game determination is a loss and does not shift the subsequent game state to the special game state ST2, if the variation time of the special symbol determined on the main control board 30 is 90 seconds Finally, scenario progress presentation is performed that does not advance to the final stage. As described above, in the scenario progress presentation, the scenario is gradually advanced from the initial stage to the stage approaching the final stage, so that the player's sense of expectation is gradually enhanced by the stepwise progress of the scenario. Will be able to And, in this embodiment, when the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the final stage with higher probability than when the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2 The scenario progress presentation will be performed.

  In order to control the above-described scenario progress presentation, the scenario progression presentation control unit 73 includes a suggestion presentation control unit 74, a first stage presentation control unit 75, and a second stage presentation control unit 76.

  The suggested effect control unit 74 is an suggested effect 103, 203 indicating the degree of expectation that the scenario progress effect starting from the initial stage proceeds to the final stage between the first stage effects 100 and 200 and the second stage effects 104 and 204. To make The suggestion effect control unit 74 suggests suggestion effect 103 indicating the degree of expectation based on whether or not the predetermined operation is performed within a predetermined period after the operation guidance image for prompting the predetermined operation on the operation button 6 is displayed. Let's do 203

  When the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs the suggestion effect 103, 203, the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the suggestion effect 103, 203 based on the result of the special game determination made by the special game determination unit 52 (see FIGS. 19 and 54). . Therefore, when the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the suggestion effect 103 that the expectation for the scenario progress effect to reach the final stage is higher than in the case of the determination result not to shift to the special game state ST2. , 203 will be performed.

  The first stage effect control unit 75 performs first stage effects 100 and 200 for advancing the scenario progress effect to the first stage according to a predetermined operation on the operation button 6 by the player. The first stage effects 100 and 200 do not advance the scenario progress effect to the final stage, but are effects for advancing the scenario progress effect to the first stage before the final stage. The first stage effect control unit 75 causes the player to operate the operation button 6 within a predetermined period after the operation guidance image for prompting the user to perform the predetermined operation such as a single press operation or a long press operation When it is determined that the player has not performed a predetermined operation (see FIGS. 19 and 54), scenario progress presentation may not be progressed. In that case, the scenario progress presentation does not proceed to the final stage. Therefore, the player positively operates the operation button 6 to advance the scenario progress presentation.

  The second stage effect control unit 76 operates after the first stage effect 100, 200 and the suggestive effect 103, 203 are performed by the first stage effect control unit 75, and the scenario progress stage proceeds from the first stage to the final stage After the second stage scenario progress presentation 105, 205 to be performed, the final result notification production 106, 206 (scenario progress presentation progress to the final stage from the first stage to the final stage 107, 207, failure presentation not to the final stage After the effect 108, 208 or the failure effect 109, 209, the resurrection effect 110, 210) is performed (see FIGS. 19 and 54). The second stage effect control unit 76 plays a game within a predetermined period after the operation guidance image for prompting a predetermined operation on the operation button 6 is displayed as the second stage scenario progress effect 105 in the second stage effect 104. The final result notification effect 106, 206 is received at the timing when it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 6 (see FIG. 19, FIG. 29 and FIG. 54) and that the player has made a long press on the operation button 6 It may be done. However, even when the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the predetermined operation on the operation button 6 by the player has not been performed during the predetermined period, the result of the special game determination shifts to the special game state ST2 Depending on whether or not the predetermined period has passed, the reviving effects 110 and 210 are performed after the success effects 107 and 207, the failure effects 108 and 208 not progressing to the final stage, or the failure effects 109 and 209. Further, when the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the second stage effect control unit 76 has a higher probability than the case where the result of the special game determination is not to transition to the special game state ST2. In the two-stage effect 104, 204, the success effect 107, 207 is performed after the second stage scenario progress effect 105, 205, and in the success effect 107, 207 or after the success effect 107, 207, in the special game determination The result is a big hit, and it is informed that the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2.

  The special game effect control unit 72 operates when the symbol variation effect performed by the normal game effect control unit 71 ends and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special game state ST2, and effects in the special game state ST2 are performed. It is to control. As described above, in the special game state ST2, a round game in which the first large winning opening 17 and the second large winning opening 18 are alternatively opened is performed a plurality of times (multiple rounds). Therefore, for example, while the plurality of round games are performed, the special game effect control unit 72 causes the image display 12 to display the current number of rounds, or the like, and performs an effect corresponding to the special game state ST2.

◆ Scenario progress presentation based on scenario presentation pattern 78 ◆
Hereinafter, scenario progress presentation will be described in detail when the scenario presentation pattern 78 is selected by the presentation pattern determination unit 70. The scenario effect pattern 78 is executed as a reach effect, and includes a first scenario effect pattern 781 and a second scenario effect pattern 782 having different basic effects. The first scenario effect pattern 781 includes six first scenario effect patterns A to F. These first scenario effect patterns A to F share the basic effect but differ in the second stage effect 104. The second scenario rendering pattern 782 includes two second scenario rendering patterns A and B. These second scenario rendering patterns A and B have the same basic rendering but different suggestion rendering 203.

<Scenario progress presentation based on first scenario presentation pattern 781>
First, the basic effect of the first scenario effect pattern 781 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing the timing of the first scenario effect pattern 781 defined in advance in the scenario effect pattern 78. When the first scenario effect pattern 781 is selected by the effect pattern determination unit 70, the scenario progress effect control unit 73 selects the first stage effect control unit 75, the suggested effect control unit 74, and the second step effect control unit 76 in this order. The first stage effect 100, the suggested effect 103 and the second stage effect 104 defined as the first scenario effect pattern 781 are executed at predetermined timings.

  When scenario progress presentation based on the first scenario presentation pattern 781 starts at timing T0, first, the first stage presentation control unit 75 executes the first stage presentation 100 in the first stage presentation period (T0 to T2) To function.

  The first stage effect control unit 75 starts the title display 101 corresponding to the first scenario effect pattern 781 at timing T0 and continues the title display 101 for the title display period (T0 to T1). The first stage effect control unit 75 determines that the timing T1 which is the start timing of the first stage scenario progress effect period (T1 to T2) after the title display period (T0 to T1) has elapsed, ie, the title display period If it is determined that T1) has ended, then the first stage scenario progress presentation 102 is started.

When the first stage scenario progress effect 102 is started at timing T1, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the single push operation guidance image to be displayed to prompt the player to perform the single push operation of the operation button 6, and the subsequent single blow operation. in pushing operation acceptance lifetime _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ with accepting a one-base hit pressing operation of the operation button 6 by the player, whether one-base hit pressing operation is performed in the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ the Determine Furthermore, the first stage performance control unit 75, if it is determined that there is one-base hit pressed by the player in one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} inside, after the determination (one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 ₁ to T1 ₂₎ performing a first stage scenario progression effect 102 to advance the elapsed even when no) predetermined first scenario advancing effect until the first stage. This first stage is a stage that has advanced to the final stage rather than the initial stage and is a stage that has not been reached yet.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no one-base hit pressing operation by the player, the first stage performance control unit 75, one-base hit pressing operation after accepting the validity period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} has elapsed, a predetermined phase progression effect first scenario Advance to When the player does not receive a single-press operation, the stage at which the scenario progress effect progresses is the minimum progress width, which is a stage smaller than the first stage. In other words, if the player performs a single-push operation within the single-push operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the scenario progress presentation progresses more than if the single-push operation is not performed. A player who expects to advance to the final stage actively performs a single-press operation on the operation button 6. In the first stage effect 100, an effect of causing the scenario progress effect to proceed to the first stage is performed at least once by accepting the single-push operation as described above. Then, after the start of the first stage effect 100, at the timing T2, the first stage effect 100 by the first stage effect control unit 75 ends.

  In the first stage scenario progress presentation 102, instead of advancing the scenario presentation by the presence or absence of the player's single hit operation on the operation button 6, the scenario presentation is advanced by the presence or absence of the continuous hit operation or the long press operation, etc. You may do so. In the case of determining the progress of the first stage scenario progress effect 102 based on the presence or absence of an operation other than a long press operation such as a single hit operation or a continuous hit operation, the operation acceptance effective for determining the presence or absence of an operation other than the long press operation When the long press operation is performed within the period, the stage in which the scenario progress presentation progresses may be set to the minimum progress width. That is, when the long press operation is performed in the operation reception period other than the long press operation, the process is performed as if the long press operation is not performed, and the production mode is not changed according to the long press operation. (You may not want to execute a long press effect). Furthermore, the first stage scenario progress presentation 102 determines the stage in which the scenario progress presentation proceeds based only on the result of the special game determination, regardless of the single-press operation on the operation button 6 by the player, etc., and executes this decision. You may do it.

  At timing T2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 functions to execute the suggestion effect 103 within the suggestion effect period (T2 to T3). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 103 from the timing T2, and ends the suggestion effect 103 at the timing T3.

  When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 103, the scenario progress presentation is final based on the result of the special game determination and the presence or absence of the single hit operation in the plurality of single hit operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3). Performs a production that indicates the degree of expectation to progress to the stage. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 suggests an expectation that the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage, for example, a plurality of characters 80a and 80b are displayed on the image display 12, and the plurality of characters 80a and 80b exchange conversations The degree of expectation is suggested by the conversation content of time (see FIG. 23). Then, at timing T3, the suggestion effect 103 by the suggestion effect control unit 74 ends.

  In the present embodiment, up to three speech effects are performed, but these speech effects are sequentially performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, three single hit operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3) are provided corresponding to the three speech effects, and the player operates the operation button 6 in each single hit operation valid period. The presence or absence of execution of each speech effect is determined depending on whether or not a single-press operation is performed. In this way, if the expectation of whether or not the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage is suggested according to the operation of the operation button 6 by the player, the player can single-press the operation button 6 There is no indication of the expectation of whether or not the scenario progress presentation will proceed to the final stage. Therefore, the player positively operates the operation button 6.

It should be noted that the player did not perform a single-press operation on the operation button 6 by the player within the first or second single-push operation acceptance valid period of the three single-push operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3). In this case, even if a single push operation is performed in the subsequent single push operation reception valid period, the speech effect for the single push operation reception valid period (1) to (3) and the single push operation reception after the single push operation reception valid period The execution of the speech effect for the valid periods (1) to (3) may be limited. Here, "to limit the execution of the speech effect" is not limited to not performing the speech effect, but a single push operation was performed within three single push operation reception valid periods (1) to (3). It includes performing other effects (not limited to speech effects) different from the speech effects provided for the occasion. Other effects different from the speech effect are that the contents of conversation when the plurality of characters 80a and 80b have a conversation are special contents, that a special character appears, special to the plurality of characters 80a and 80b It can be exemplified that the background appears. In addition, the second step in the second step effect 104 to be executed later according to the operation content of the operation button 6 by the player in the single-push operation reception valid period (1) to (3) at the time of execution of the suggestion effect 103 You may make it limit the presentation content performed by the scenario progress presentation 105. FIG. Specifically, in one example, at least one single push operation reception valid period (1) to (3) of three single push operation reception valid periods (1) to (3), the suggestion effect control unit When it is determined that the long press operation 74 is performed or when it is determined that the single push operation is not performed, the operation acceptance valid period (T3 ₁ to 5) for the operation button 6 in the second stage scenario progress presentation 105 in the second stage presentation 104 Even if a predetermined operation is performed in T4), execution of a predetermined effect to be performed after the predetermined operation may be limited. Here, "restricting the execution of the effect" includes not only performing the predetermined effect but also performing other effects different from the predetermined effect.

  Furthermore, regardless of the operation of the operation button 6 by the player, based on the result of the special game determination, an effect may be provided to suggest an expectation that the scenario progress effect proceeds to the final stage at a predetermined timing. In one example, the suggestion effect may be executed without prompting the player to operate the operation button 6, or the player may be prompted to operate the operation button 6 and the suggestion effect is performed regardless of the operation of the operation button 6 or the like. May be performed.

  Of course, since the suggestion mode by the speech effect in the present embodiment is an example, it is possible to suggest an expectation that the scenario progress presentation proceeds to the final stage in other suggestion modes.

At timing T3, the second stage effect control unit 76 functions to execute the second stage effect 104 in the second stage effect period (T3 to T6). That is, the second stage the performance control unit 76 starts the second stage scenario progression effect 105 from the timing T3, after the second stage scenario progression effect 105, in the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) When the player performs a long press operation on the operation button 6 or timing T4, the final result notification effect 106 is performed.

  The final result notification effect 106 is a success effect 107 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage as described above, a failure effect 108 in which the scenario progress effect does not progress in the final step or a resurrection effect 110 after the failure effect 109 It is carried out as an effect to be played. The success effect 107 continues until timing T6, and ends at timing T6. On the other hand, the failure effect 108 continues until timing T6, and ends at timing T6. The failure presentation 109 continues until timing T5. When the failure effect 109 is performed, the resurrection effect 110 is started from timing T5. The revival effect 110 continues until timing T6, and ends at timing T6.

  As described above, the first scenario effect pattern 781 is a 90 second effect pattern to be performed within the period of timing T0 to T6, and if the success effect 107 or the revival effect 110 is finally performed, the transition to the special game state ST2 is made This is what is called a confirmed effect in which the player is informed.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing one aspect of the title display 101 and the first stage scenario progress presentation 102 which are the first stage presentation 100 performed by the first stage presentation control unit 75. As shown in FIG. Although only an example of the screen displayed on the image display 12 is shown in FIG. 20, a screen displayed on the image display 12 with some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display 12 and Interlocking effects may be performed.

  When the first-stage effect control unit 75 starts execution of scenario progress effect based on the first scenario effect pattern 781, the first-stage effect control unit 75 first causes the image display 12 to display the title display 101. In the title display 101, the player is notified of how to proceed with scenario progress presentation based on the first scenario presentation pattern 781. In the example of FIG. 20, the message “Press the button to complete the RUSH constellation!” Is displayed, and the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is less than the predetermined time and the long press operation is not determined. By doing, it is informed that if the RUSH constellation can finally be completed, the player will be provided with an advantageous gaming value. That is, in the example of the scenario progress presentation based on the first scenario presentation pattern 781, a scenario for the purpose of finally completing the RUSH constellation proceeds.

When the first stage effect control unit 75 starts the first step scenario progress effect 102 after the title display 101, the initial screen 102a of the first step scenario progress effect 102 is displayed on the image display 12, as shown in FIG. Display. In this initial screen 102a, the stars constituting the RUSH constellation are displayed in a blank (in the example of FIG. 20, white) and displayed, and the RUSH constellation is in an incomplete state. After displaying such an initial screen 102a, becomes the start timing T1 ₁ operation receiving lifetime press one-base hit by the player _(T1 1 to T1 _2), first stage performance control unit 75, a predetermined initial screen 102a The operation guidance image 102a ′ ′ for prompting the player to perform the single press operation on the operation button 6 is superimposed on the area 102a ′ and displayed. That is, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs the single press operation on the player. By displaying such an operation guide image 102 a ′ ′, the player grasps that the single push operation on the operation button 6 has become effectively accepted. can do.

When the single-push operation on the operation button 6 by the player is performed within the single-push operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the first stage effect control unit 75 advances the scenario progress effect to the next step ( The first stage is determined, and the display execution screen of the image display 12 is changed from the initial screen 102a to the second screen 102b in response to the acceptance of the single press operation within the effective period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ). Execute a single hit effect to change the. In this second screen 102b, a large number of meteors appear in the screen of the image display 12, and the stars fill in the predetermined order with respect to the empty space of the stars constituting the RUSH constellation (white in the example of FIG. 20) The unpainted part is colored black). Thus, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the scenario progress presentation to proceed to the next stage (first stage) determined in advance.

  FIG. 21A is a view showing the concept of processing by the first stage effect control unit 75, and shows the order in which the meteors bury the RUSH constellation. FIG. 21 (b) shows the first stage determined by the presence or absence of the single-press operation. First, as shown in FIG. 21A, when the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the unlit stars constituting the RUSH constellation to light up on the second screen 102b (when filling the empty stars), as shown in FIG. The stars are lit one by one in a predetermined order. In other words, in the RUSH constellation, the progression order of the scenario is predetermined such that the constellations are completed one by one in the order of the R constellation, the U constellation, the S constellation, and the H constellation. In addition, it is necessary for all 26 unlit stars to be lit by meteors in order to complete the RUSH constellation. When the first stage effect control unit 75 decides the first stage for advancing scenario progress effect, it turns on seven, ten, thirteen, and twenty stars as shown in FIG. 21 (b). One lighting pattern is selected from the four lighting patterns. At this time, the first stage effect control unit 75 may select one of the four lighting patterns according to the result of the special game determination. For example, in the case where the result of the special game determination is a big hit and the subsequent game state is to be shifted to the special game state ST2, a lighting pattern in which the number of lighting of the star is larger One lighting pattern may be selected such that the probability of being selected is high.

  When the single-press operation is not performed, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines the next stage for advancing the first scenario progress effect as the stage with the smallest number of lights (the number of lights is 4). For example, in the example of FIG. 21 (b), the next step of advancing the first scenario progress effect when the single push operation is not performed is the lighting number 4, and the first scenario is more than the case where the single push operation is performed. The degree of progression of the stage effect decreases.

  Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the display screen of the image display 12 to transition from the second screen 102b to the third screen 102c after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second screen 102b is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 20, among the RUSH constellations, the R constellation and the U constellation are completed, and the S constellation and the H constellation have progressed to the first stage where they have not been completed (the number of lights of the star is It is 13 states).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the single-push operation on the operation button 6 within the single-push-operation reception valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the first-stage effect control unit 75 The next step of advancing the scenario progression presentation after the elapse of T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) is determined as the minimum travel width (the number of lighting of the star is 4). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the display screen of the image display 12 to transition from the initial screen 102 a to the fourth screen 102 d. In the fourth screen 102d, as with the second screen 102b, a meteor appears in the screen of the image display 12, and lights up unlit stars constituting the RUSH constellation.

  In the fourth screen 102d in the case where the single hit operation is not performed, the appearance number of meteors is made smaller than the second screen 102b in the case where the single hit operation is performed, and the scenario progresses more than the second screen 102b. It may be notified that the degree of progression of the effect is small. Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the scenario progress effect to progress by the minimum travel width (the number of lighting of the star is four). When a predetermined time elapses after the fourth screen 102 d is displayed, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the display screen of the image display 12 to transition from the fourth screen 102 d to the fifth screen 102 e. At this time, as shown in FIG. 20, among the RUSH constellations, only the four stars of the R constellation are lit, and the scenario progression presentation is advanced by the minimum progression width.

Thus the first stage scenario progress presentation 102 based on the scenario effect pattern 78, the one-base hit pressing operation by the player in one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} in is accepted, one-base hit pressing operation is accepted The first stage scenario progress effect 102 comes closer to the final stage than it would have otherwise. Therefore, the player positively performs a single hit operation in the first stage scenario progress presentation 102 of the first stage presentation 100.

Figure 22 is diagram showing an example of the waveform of the operation signal SGN output from the operation buttons 6 on the one-base hit pressing operation accepting valid period in the first stage scenario progression effect period _(T1 1 ~T1 _2). Here, the operation signal SGN output from the operation button 6 indicates the operation status of the operation button 6, that is, whether the operation button 6 is operated or not operated. When the operation button 6 is operated, the signal output from the operation button 6 is, for example, a high level signal indicating a switch on state. On the other hand, when the operation button 6 is not operated, the signal output from the operation button 6 is, for example, a low level signal indicating a switch off state. Therefore, the first stage performance control unit 75, based on a signal at one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 to T1 _2), one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 to T1 ₂₎ one-base hit pressed into the It can be determined whether or not it has been.

In the waveform example shown in FIG. 22 (a), from the ON state to the OFF state after the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 is changed from the off state to the on state in the one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ the Change. In this waveform example, it can be determined that the operation state with respect to the operation button 6 (movable body 6a) has been canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed since the player operated the operation button 6 (movable body 6a). The first stage performance control unit 75, when the operation button switch 6b from being detected on edge there is continuous operation time in the ON state is less than a predetermined time, one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 ₁ to T1 ₂ It is determined that the single-press operation has been performed, and it is determined that the long-press operation has been performed when the continuous operation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. Specifically, the first stage performance control unit 75, one-base hit pressing operation acceptance on the validity period _(T1 1 to T1 ₂₎ in - first of off-edge between ON signal counter (RAM 33c of the on-signal count storage unit 69d 1 The storage area is referred to, and it is determined that a single hit operation has been performed if the count number is less than a predetermined number from the detection of the on edge to the detection of the off edge. On the other hand, the first stage performance control unit 75, on the one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} in - reference to off-edge between ON signal counter, on - the value of the off-edge between ON signal number counter is predetermined When the number is reached, it is determined that the long press operation has been performed.

In the waveform example shown in FIG. 22 (b), transition remains in the ON state after the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ Operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 in the changes from the off state to the on state Do. In this waveform example, it can be determined that while the operation of the operation by the player button 6 (movable member 6a) is performed one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} has elapsed. The first stage performance control unit 75, when the continuous operating time on edge is the operation button switch 6b from being detected in the ON state is less than the predetermined time, one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 ₁ to T1 ₂ ) It is determined that there has been a single-press operation within the area, and it is determined that a long-press operation has been performed when the continuous operation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Specifically, the first stage effect control unit 75 refers to the on signal number counter between on and off edges, and the count number is predetermined at the time when the single-push operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) ends. When it is less than the number, it is determined that there is a single hit operation. On the other hand, the first stage performance control unit 75, on the one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} in - reference to off-edge between ON signal counter, on - the value of the off-edge between ON signal number counter is predetermined When the number is reached, it is determined that the long press operation has been performed.

Conversely, in a waveform example shown in FIG. 22 (c), one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ Operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 in the changes from the ON state to the OFF state, It remains in the off state. In this waveform example, the operation has been performed from before the start of the one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} operation by (at least initiated when) the player button 6 (movable member 6a), one-base hit pressed it can be determined that reception operation state for the effective period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} operation after a certain time has elapsed from the start button 6 (movable member 6a) is released. In this waveform example, since the on-edge is not detected within the single-press operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ), the value of the on signal counter between on and off edges remains "0" and the on edge is not detected. from the off edge is detected, the first stage performance control unit 75 determines that there is no one-base hit pressing operation and long press operation in one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} within.

In the waveform example shown in FIG. 22 (d), one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 _{~T1 2)} Operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 within the transitions remains on. In this waveform example, the operation has been performed from before the start of the one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} operation by (at least initiated when) the player button 6 (movable member 6a), one-base hit pressed it can be determined that operation of the operation button 6 is continued (movable body 6a) is performed in the reception effective period _(T1 1 to T1 ₂₎ within. In this waveform example, the value of the on signal number counter during the on / off edge remains “0” within the single-push operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) and both the on edge and the off edge are not detected. the first stage performance control unit 75 determines that there is no one-base hit pressing operation and long press operation in one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} within.

In yet a waveform example shown in FIG. 22 (e), the operation button switch 6b has remained kept off the one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime _(T1 1 _{~T1 2)} within. In this waveform example, it can be determined that the operation of the operation by the player button 6 (movable member 6a) is not performed in the one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} within. In this waveform example, since the value of the on signal number counter between on and off edges remains “0” and both the on edge and the off edge are not detected, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines that the single hit operation acceptance valid period It is determined that the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) is not operated (is not operated) in (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ).

The first stage performance control unit 75, one-base hit pressing operation accepting push one-base hit in the effective period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} operation determines whether or not to change the execution mode of the effect in accordance with operation conditions such long press operation or non-operation Then, a command indicating the determined content is set in the transmission buffer 68 of the RAM 33c.

Thus, the first stage performance control unit 75, (sensed on edge) one-base hit pressing operation receiving operation for the validity period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} operation by the player in the button 6 (movable member 6a) is performed In the waveform examples of FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b) in which the on-edge is detected, it is determined that there is no single hit operation except when the continuous operation time to the operation button 6 is less than a predetermined time. That is, in addition to the case where the player does not operate the operation button 6 (FIG. 22 (e)), the first stage effect control unit 75 performs a single hit even when the operation button 6 is operated. operation reception when in a state where the operation button 6 is operated at the start of the validity period _(T1 1 _{~T1 2) (FIG.} 22 (c) and FIG. 22 (d)), it is determined that one-base hit pressing operation was not. Thus, the first stage performance control unit 75, even one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} operation on the operation button 6 in was in a state of being made, the operation is pressed for a long etc. If it is an irregular operation different from the single-pressing operation, it is not determined that the single-pressing operation is performed. If the result, in the first stage scenario progression director 102 of the first stage effect 100 is irregular operations, such as one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} of the operation long press operation of the operation button 6 The first stage scenario progress presentation 102 is performed as a presentation that proceeds by the minimum progression width. Therefore, even in the case where the result of the special game determination is a big hit (when the subsequent game state is to be shifted to the special game state ST2), the operation of the single hit operation reception valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) When the operation on the button 6 is an irregular operation such as a long press operation, the possibility that the scenario progress presentation will progress to the final stage is low. This urges the player who determines the expectation of whether or not the result of the special game determination is a big hit according to the progress degree of the scenario progress effect, to advance the first step scenario progress effect 102, and the operation button It is possible to suppress the anomalous operation with respect to 6.

In the example described with reference to the waveform example of Fig. 22, but in addition to the one-base hit pressing operation so that to determine the presence or absence of long press operation in the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ The presence or absence of the long press operation need not necessarily be determined. In this case, the off edge is detected on the condition that the on edge is detected (see FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)) regardless of the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a). Under the condition of (see FIG. 22 (c)), or under the condition that both the on-edge and the off-edge are detected (see FIG. 22 (a)), it may be determined that the single hit operation is performed. Also, in the first stage scenario progress presentation of the first stage effect 100, the first stage which is the maximum progress degree determined in advance, on condition that the continuous hit operation is performed instead of using the single hit operation as the condition. It may be made to progress to

  FIG. 23A is a view showing an aspect of the suggestion effect 103 performed by the suggestion effect control unit 74. As shown in FIG. Although FIG. 23A shows only an example of the screen displayed on the image display 12, some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display 12 are displayed on the image display 12. Effects may be linked to the screen.

  When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 103 after the above-described first stage scenario progress effect 102, as shown in FIG. 23A, the image display 12 displays a single hit on the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a). The first single push operation guide image 103a in which the two characters 80a and 80b appear to prompt the push operation, the second single push operation guide image 103c, and the third single push operation guide image 103e every predetermined time Display in order. That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 executes a single hit instruction effect to notify the player that the single hit operation is possible. The suggestion effect control unit 74 displays the first single push operation guide image 103a, the second single push operation guide image 103c, or the third single push operation guide image 103e, and then displays these single push operation guide images 103a. , 103c, and 103e in the single-push-operation acceptance valid period (1), the single-push-operation valid period (2) or the single-push-operation valid period (3) (see FIGS. 19 and 25) Under the condition that it is performed, a single click effect for changing the effect execution mode by displaying the first speech effect screen 103b, the second speech effect screen 103d or the third speech effect screen 103f on the image display 12 Run. In the first speech effect screen 103b, the first character 80a emits the first speech 81b, and in the second speech effect screen 103d, the second character 80b emits the second speech 81d. Then, in the third speech effect screen 103f, the first character 80a emits the third speech 81f. The suggestion effect control unit 74 suggests the degree of expectation that the scenario progress presentation proceeds to the final stage, based on the contents of the serifs 81b, 81d, and 81f emitted by the plurality of characters 80a and 80b.

  FIG. 23 (b) shows the relationship between the content of words uttered by a plurality of characters 80a and 80b and the degree of expectation. Here, the single push operation reception valid period includes, for example, a single push operation reception valid period (1), a single push operation reception valid period (2) and a single push operation reception valid period (3) (FIG. 19 and FIG. 25).

  The serifs 81b, 81d, and 81f emitted by the plurality of characters 80a and 80b have four serif patterns from the first serif pattern to the fourth serif pattern. The first serif pattern is a pattern with the lowest degree of expectation that the scenario progress presentation proceeds to the final stage. The second serif pattern is a pattern in which the expectation for the scenario progress effect to progress to the final stage is higher than the first serif pattern, and the expectation is an intermediate degree. The third serif pattern is a pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation, in which the degree of scenario progress rendering progresses to the final stage is higher than that of the second pattern. Furthermore, the fourth speech pattern is a pattern that suggests that the scenario progress presentation has the highest expectation of proceeding to the final stage, and it is determined that the scenario progression presentation has progressed to the final stage. The suggestion effect control unit 74 selects one of the four serif patterns based on the result of the special game determination and sets serifs 81b, 81d, 81f emitted by the plurality of characters 80a, 80b, and suggests The effect 103 is performed.

  Further, in the first to third speech effects that the plurality of characters 80a and 80b emit the speeches 81b, 81d and 81f, the single-stroke operation is performed within the single-stroke operation reception valid period (1) to (3) as described above. It is done on the condition that it is done. Therefore, in the case where the total number of single-push operations in the single-push-operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3) is three (single-push operation is performed in all the single-push-operation valid periods (1) to (3) All the first to third speech effects are executed. In addition, when the total number of single push operation in the single push operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3) is two (single push operation in two of the single push operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3) When only the first and second dialogue effects are performed, and the total number of single-push operations in the single-push-operation acceptance period (1) to (3) is one (single-push operation) In the case where a single hit operation is performed in one of the reception valid periods (1) to (3)), only the first speech effect is executed. When the total number of single-push operations in the single-push-operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3) is 0 (a single-push operation is performed in any of the single-push-operation effective periods (1) to (3) In the case of no), none of the first to third speech effects are executed.

If the first stage effect control unit 75 determines that the player has not performed a single push operation in the first stage effect 100, even if the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, The suggestion effect control unit 74 may not select the fourth serif pattern among the four patterns. In this case, on the condition that the first stage effect control unit 75 determines that the single-step push operation is performed in the first stage scenario progress effect 102 of the first stage effect 100, the suggested effect 103 in the fourth serif pattern is a line since so divided, the player will perform an active and appropriate one-base hit pressed in the first stage one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity of the scenario progress effect 102 _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ within. In addition, the suggestion effect control unit 74 does not require the player to perform a single push operation on the operation button 6, and the first to third words for each of the first screen 103a, the second screen 103b, and the third screen 103c. May be displayed sequentially.

  FIG. 24 is a view showing the relationship between the operation pattern on the operation button 6 (the movable body 6 a) in the suggestion effect 103 and the speech effect. Specifically, FIG. 24 (a) shows that the long press operation is performed in any of the single press operation reception valid period (1), the single press operation valid period (2) and the single press operation valid period (3) FIG. 24 (b) shows the relationship between the operation pattern and speech effect in the case of not being performed, and FIG. The relationship between the operation pattern and the speech effect when the long press operation is performed in any of 3) is shown.

  Here, the speech effect is the first speech effect in which the character 80a emits the first speech 81b as described above, the second speech effect in which the character 80b emits the second speech 81d, and the character 80a is the third. It includes a third speech effect that emits speech 81 f. These first to third speech effects are executed under the condition that the single-push operation on the operation button 6 by the player is performed within the single-push-operation accepting period (1) to (3). The single-pushing operation reception effective period corresponds to the presence of three speech effects, and exists three times within the suggested effect period as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the player performs a single-press operation on the operation button 6 during the three single-push operation reception valid periods (1) to (3) in the suggested effect period (T2 to T3). The combination of whether or not it has become eight patterns of operation patterns 1 to 8.

  The operation pattern 1 corresponds to “single push operation presence → single push operation presence → single push operation presence”. In the case of the operation pattern 1, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “first speech effect → second speech effect → third speech effect”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 1, all of the first to third speech effects are performed in the suggestion effect 103.

  The operation pattern 2 corresponds to “single push operation presence → single push operation presence → non-single push operation”. In the case of the operation pattern 2, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “first speech effect → second speech effect → no speech effect”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 2, in the suggestion effect 103, the first speech effect and the second speech effect are performed, and the third speech effect is not performed.

  The operation pattern 3 corresponds to “single push operation presence → non-single push operation absence → single push operation presence”. In the case of the operation pattern 3, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “first speech effect → no speech effect → second speech effect”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 3, in the suggestion effect 103, the first speech effect and the second speech effect are performed, and the third speech effect is not performed.

  The operation pattern 4 corresponds to "single hit pressing operation → no single hit pressing operation → no single hit pressing operation". In the case of the operation pattern 4, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “first speech effect → no speech effect → no speech effect”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 4, only the first speech effect is performed in the suggestion effect 103, and the second and third speech effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 5 corresponds to “no single hit pressing operation → single hit pressing operation present → single hit pressing operation present”. In the case of the operation pattern 5, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “no speech effect → first speech effect → second speech effect”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 5, in the suggestion effect 103, the first and second speech effects are performed, and the third speech effect is not performed.

  The operation pattern 6 corresponds to "no single hit pressing operation → single hit pressing operation present → no single hit pressing operation". In the case of this operation pattern 6, the speech effect pattern in the suggested presentation 103 is "no speech effect → first speech effect → no speech effect". Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 6, only the first speech effect is performed in the suggestion effect 103, and the second and third speech effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 7 corresponds to "no single hit pressing operation → no single hit pressing operation → single hit pressing operation". In the case of this operation pattern 7, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “no speech effect → no speech effect → first speech effect”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 7, only the first speech effect is performed in the suggestion effect 103, and the second and third speech effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 8 corresponds to “no single hit pressing operation → no single hit pressing operation → no single hit pressing operation”. In the case of the operation pattern 8, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “no speech effect → no speech effect → no speech effect”. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 8, none of the first to third speech effects is performed in the suggestion effect 103.

  As described above, in the case of the operation pattern 1 in which the single push operation is performed in all of the three single push operation reception valid periods (1) to (3), all of the first to third serif effects are lines. Since all of the first to third serifs 81b, 81d and 81f are displayed, it is possible to obtain maximum information regarding the degree of expectation of whether or not the result of the special game determination is a jackpot. On the contrary, in the case of the operation pattern 8 in which the single hit operation is not performed in all of the three single hit operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3), any of the first to third serif effects is Since none of the first to third serifs 81b, 81d, 81f is displayed because it is not performed, it is not possible to obtain any information on the degree of expectation that the scenario progress presentation proceeds to the final stage.

  In addition, in the operation patterns 2, 3 and 5 in which the single-push operation is performed in two of the three effective single-push operation reception valid periods (1) to (3), the second serif effect is performed. Operation pattern 4 in which the first and second serifs 81b and 81d are displayed, and the single hit operation is performed in one of the three single hit operation reception valid periods (1) to (3). , 6 and 7, only the first serif 81 b is displayed. That is, as the number of times that the single push operation is performed among the three single push operation acceptance valid periods (1) to (3) increases, the speech effect progresses and the scenario progress effect progresses to the final stage. More suggestive first to third serifs 81b, 81d, 81f can be identified. Therefore, for the player who determines the expectation of whether or not the result of the special game determination is a big hit according to the progress degree of the scenario progress effect, the single hit operation is performed in the single hit operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3) Can encourage them to

Furthermore, when there is a long press operation within the single-push operation reception valid period, effects such as a dialogue effect after the long press operation is performed may be limited. Here, “restricting effects such as speech effects after the long press operation is performed” means not only the single-push operation acceptance valid period after the long press operation is performed but in long press operation valid period in the second stage effect ₁₀₄ (T3 1 ~T4) performed after, not to determine the presence or absence of a predetermined operation, such as one-base hit pressed or long-pressing operation of the operation button 6, and the predetermined Even if there is an operation, at least including not processing the predetermined operation as having been performed. Moreover, "does not process as the said predetermined operation was performed" has nothing to do with the operation condition with respect to the operation button 6 after the said long press operation was performed (even if there was a single push operation or a long press operation. In addition to not performing a predetermined effect accompanying the reception of a predetermined operation during an operation reception period such as a speech effect, that is, not changing the effect mode at all even by receiving a predetermined operation, a predetermined effect Including performing other renditions.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (b), an operation pattern in which the long press operation is performed in any one of three single-push operation reception valid periods (1) to (3) in the suggested effect period (T2 to T3) The combination of the above becomes seven patterns of the operation patterns 9 to 15 if the operation after it is determined that the long press operation has been made is not questioned. That is, the notation “-” in FIG. 24 (b) means that the presence or absence of the long press operation and the single press operation does not matter (at least the determination of the single press operation is not performed and the processing as the single press operation) doing. Therefore, a portion marked with "-" substantially includes three modes of "with single press operation", "long press operation" and "without single press operation and long press operation". There is.

  The operation pattern 9 corresponds to “long press operation present → operation irrelevant question → operation irrelevant”. In the case of the operation pattern 9, the speech effect pattern in the suggested presentation 103 is “no speech effect → no speech effect → no speech effect”. That is, since the long press operation is performed without performing the single push operation in the single push operation acceptance valid period (1), the speech effect is not performed corresponding to the single push operation acceptance valid period (1). In addition, since the long press operation is performed in the single push operation reception valid period (1), the single push operation reception valid period (2) and the single push operation reception which are subsequent to the single push operation reception valid period (1) The speech effect after the expiration of the validity period (3) is limited. That is, when the long press operation is performed in the single push operation reception valid period (1), the speech effect corresponding to the single push operation reception valid period (2) and the single push operation reception valid period (3) is performed. Absent. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 9, none of the first to third speech effects is performed in the suggestion effect 103.

  The operation pattern 10 corresponds to “single push operation presence → long press operation presence → operation unquestioned”. In the case of the operation pattern 10, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is "first speech effect → no speech effect → no speech effect". That is, since the single hit operation is performed in the single hit operation reception valid period (1), the first speech effect corresponding to the single hit operation valid period (1) is performed. Then, since the long press operation is performed in the single push operation acceptance valid period (2), the speech effect corresponding to the single push operation acceptance valid period (2) is not performed, and the single push operation acceptance valid period (2 The serif effect corresponding to the single-push-push operation reception valid period (3) which is later) is limited. That is, since the long press operation is performed in the single push operation reception valid period (2), the speech effect corresponding to the single push operation reception valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 10, in the suggestion effect 103, the first speech effect is performed, and the second and third speech effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 11 corresponds to “no single-press operation and no long-press operation → long-press operation present → operation unquestioned”. In the case of this operation pattern 11, the speech effect pattern in the suggested presentation 103 is "no speech effect → no speech effect → no speech effect". That is, since the single push operation corresponding to the single push operation acceptance valid period (1) is not performed, the first speech effect corresponding to the single push operation acceptance valid period (1) is not performed. Then, since the long press operation is performed in the single push operation acceptance valid period (2), the speech effect corresponding to the single push operation acceptance valid period (2) is not performed, and the single push operation acceptance valid period (2 The serif effect corresponding to the single-push-push operation reception valid period (3) which is later) is limited. That is, since the long press operation is performed in the single push operation reception valid period (2), the speech effect corresponding to the single push operation reception valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 11, none of the first to third speech effects is performed in the suggestion effect 103.

  The operation pattern 12 corresponds to “single push operation presence → single push operation presence → long press operation present”. In the case of the operation pattern 12, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “first speech effect → second speech effect → no speech effect”. That is, since the single push operation is performed in the single push operation acceptance effective period (1) and the single push operation acceptance effective period (2), the single push operation acceptance effective period (1) and the single push operation acceptance effective period (1) The serif effect corresponding to each of 2) is performed. Then, since the long press operation is performed in the single press operation reception valid period (3), the speech effect corresponding to the single press operation valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 12, in the suggestion effect 103, the first and second speech effects are performed, and the third speech effect is not performed.

  The operation pattern 13 corresponds to "single hit operation presence → single hit operation absent → long press operation present". In the case of the operation pattern 13, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “first speech effect → no speech effect → no speech effect”. That is, while a single push operation is performed in the single push operation reception effective period (1), a single push operation reception effective period (1) is performed because the single push operation is not performed in the single push operation reception effective period (2). While the speech effect corresponding to is performed, the speech effect corresponding to the single-push operation reception valid period (2) is not performed. Then, since the long press operation is performed in the single press operation reception valid period (3), the speech effect corresponding to the single press operation valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 13, in the suggestion effect 103, the first speech effect is performed, and the second and third speech effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 14 corresponds to “no single hit pressing operation → single hit pressing operation present → long press pressing presence”. In the case of this operation pattern 14, the speech effect pattern in the suggested effect 103 is “no speech effect → first speech effect → no speech effect”. That is, while the single-push operation receiving period (1) is not performed while the single-pushing operation period is not performed, the single-push operation receiving period (2) is performed. While the serif effect corresponding to 1) is not performed, the serif effect corresponding to the single-pushing operation reception valid period (2) is performed. Then, since the long press operation is performed in the single press operation reception valid period (3), the speech effect corresponding to the single press operation valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 14, in the suggestion effect 103, the first speech effect is performed, and the second and third speech effects are not performed.

  The operation pattern 15 corresponds to “no single hit pressing operation → no single hit pressing operation → long press presence present”. In the case of the operation pattern 15, the speech effect pattern in the suggested presentation 103 is "no speech effect → no speech effect → no speech effect". That is, since the single push operation is not performed in the single push operation acceptance valid period (1) and the single push operation acceptance valid period (2), the single push operation acceptance valid period (1) and the single push operation acceptance valid period ( There is no dialogue effect corresponding to 2). Then, since the long press operation is performed in the single press operation reception valid period (3), the speech effect corresponding to the single press operation valid period (3) is not performed. Therefore, in the case of the operation pattern 15, all of the first to third speech effects are not performed in the suggestion effect 103.

  In the suggestion effect 103, the first to third speech effects may be sequentially performed without requiring the player to operate the operation button 6, that is, regardless of the operation on the operation button 6. Further, in the suggestion effect 103, instead of setting the single-push operation as a condition, the dialogue effect may be executed on the condition that the continuous-press operation is performed. Furthermore, even when the long press operation is performed within the operation reception valid period such as the single-push operation reception valid period, the dialogue effect after the long press operation is performed may not be limited. In this case, the determination as to the presence or absence of the long press operation within the single press operation reception valid period may be omitted.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a waveform example of the operation signal SGN output from the operation button 6 in the single hit / push operation reception valid period (1) to (3) in the suggestion effect period (T2 to T3). One-base hit pressing operation accepting validity of suggested effect period (T2 to T3) is located 3 times in accordance with the maximum number of words effect as described above, one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _{(1) (T2 1 ~T2 2} ), one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _{(2) (T2 3 ~T2 4} ) and one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period including _{(3) (T2 5 ~T2 6} ).

The suggestion effect control unit 74 determines the single-push-operation acceptance valid period (based on the signal level of the single-push-operation valid period (1), the single-push-operation valid period (2) or the single-push valid period (3)). 1) In each of (3), it is determined whether or not a single push operation or a long push operation has been performed. The method of determining the presence or absence of pressing one-base hit by suggesting the performance control unit 74 operation and long press operation of the case, in the one-base hit pressing operation accepting valid period in the first stage effect period _{(T0~T2) (T1 1 ~T1 2} ) The It is the same as the determination method of the presence or absence of a single hit operation and a long press operation by the one-stage effect control unit 75.

  That is, in the waveform example shown in FIG. 25 (a), after the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 changes from the off state to the on state within the single-pressing operation reception valid period (1) to (3) Change to the state. On the other hand, in the example of the waveform shown in FIG. 25 (b), after the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 changes from the off state to the on state within the single-press operation reception valid period (1) to (3) Transition to. In these waveform examples, the suggestive effect control unit 74 detects the on-edge and then the continuous operation time in which the operation button switch 6b is in the on state is less than the predetermined time, the single hit operation acceptance valid period (1) to In (3), it is determined that the single-press operation has been performed, and it is determined that the long-press operation has been performed when the continuous operation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time.

  In the waveform example shown in FIG. 25C, the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 changes from the on state to the off state within the single-press operation reception valid period (1) to (3), and remains in the off state. . In this waveform example, since the off edge is detected without detecting the on edge, the suggestion effect control unit 74 does not have the single press operation and the long press operation in the single press operation reception valid period (1) to (3). It is determined that

  In the waveform example shown in FIG. 25 (d), the operation button switch 6b of the operation button 6 is kept in the on state in the single-pressing operation reception valid periods (1) to (3). In this waveform example, both the on-edge and the off-edge are not detected while the operation button switch 6b is in the on state, so the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a single hit within the single hit operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). It is determined that there has been no operation and long press operation.

  In the waveform example shown in FIG. 25 (e), the operation button switch 6b remains off in the single-pressing operation reception valid periods (1) to (3). In this waveform example, both the on-edge and the off-edge are not detected while the operation button switch 6b is in the off state, so the suggestion effect control unit 74 operates the operation button within the single-push operation reception valid period (1) to (3). It is determined that there is no operation of 6 (the movable body 6a) (no operation).

  Then, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not to change the execution mode of the effect in accordance with the operation situation such as a single push operation, a long push operation or no operation in each of the single push operation reception valid periods (1) to (3). Then, a command indicating the determined content is set in the transmission buffer 68 of the RAM 33c.

  In this manner, the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the player to operate the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) within the single-press operation reception valid period (1) to (3), and the on edge is detected (FIG. 25). In the waveform examples of (a) and FIG. 25 (b), it is determined that there is no single-press operation except when the continuous operation time to the operation button 6 is less than the predetermined time. That is, in addition to the case where the player does not operate the operation button 6 (FIG. 25 (e)), the suggestion effect control unit 74 accepts the single-push operation even when the operation button 6 is operated. When the operation button 6 is in the operating state at the start of the valid periods (1) to (3) (Fig. 25 (c) and Fig. 25 (d)), it is determined that there is no single hit operation. Therefore, even if there is an operation on the operation button 6 within the single press operation reception valid period (1) to (3), the suggested effect control unit 74 has an anomaly different from the operation different from the single press operation such as a long press operation. In the case of a manual operation, it is not determined that the operation is a single push operation. As a result, in the suggestion effect 103, when the operation on the operation button 6 in the single-push operation reception valid period (1) to (3) is anomalous operation such as a long press operation, at least a part of the serif effect is Not run. Therefore, even if the result of the special game determination is a big hit (if it is to shift the subsequent game state to the special game state ST2), the operation of the single hit operation reception valid period (1) to (3) When the operation on the button 6 is an irregular operation such as a long press operation, the possibility that the characters 80a and 80b advance to the third speech effect producing the third speech 81f which is the final speech is low. Thus, the third serif 81 f for the player who determines the degree of expectation of whether or not the result of the special game determination is the big win according to the contents of the first to third serifs 81 b, 81 d, 81 f in the speech effect. It is possible to urge the speech effect to proceed to the third speech effect producing the third character, and to suppress the irregular operation on the operation button 6.

  In the example described with reference to the waveform example of FIG. 25, in addition to the single push operation, the presence or absence of the long push operation is determined in the single push operation acceptance valid period (1) to (3). The presence or absence of the long press operation need not necessarily be determined. In this case, the off edge is detected on the condition that the on edge is detected (see FIGS. 25A and 25B) regardless of the operation time of the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a). It may be determined that a single hit operation has been performed under the condition (see FIG. 25C) or on condition that both the on edge and the off edge are detected (see FIG. 25A).

  FIGS. 26 to 28 are diagrams showing one mode of the second stage effect 104 performed by the second stage effect control unit 76. FIG. 26 to 28 show only screen examples displayed on the image display 12, but some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display 12 are displayed on the image display 12. Effects may be linked to the screen.

  Here, the second stage effect 104 includes a second stage scenario progress effect 105 and a final result notification effect 106 for notifying the final result of the scenario progress effect performed after the effect indicating the final result (see FIG. 19). The final result notification effect 106 includes three modes of a success effect 107 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage, a failure effect 108 which does not progress to the final phase, and a reactivation effect 110 after the failure effect 109 .

In the second stage effect 104, when the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the second stage scenario progress effect 105 after the above-described suggestion effect 103, as shown in FIG. The initial screen 105 a of the scenario progress presentation 105 is displayed. In this initial screen 105a, the constellation lighting state at the stage of progress in the first stage scenario progress presentation 102 of the first stage presentation 100 is displayed. And after displaying the initial screen 105a, becomes the start timing T3 ₁ long press operation accepting validity by the player _(T3 1 to T4), the second stage the performance control unit 76 hold the initial screen 105a The operation guidance image 105a 'is superimposed and displayed, and reception of a long press operation by the player is started. That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 executes the long press operation instruction effect to notify the player that the long press operation is possible.

When the operation of the operation button 6 by the player to the operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} in the hold (movable body 6a) is performed, the second stage the performance control unit 76 accepts the operation of the operation button 6 In response to this, a long press effect is performed to change the effect execution mode from the initial screen 105 a to the second screen 105 b on the display screen of the image display 12. In the second screen 105b, a large number of meteors appear again in the screen of the image display 12, and the stars are filled in the predetermined order with respect to the remaining blank portions constituting the RUSH constellation.

The second stage performance control unit 76, a long press operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} in the case of long-press operation of the operation button 6 is determined to have been performed, the display screen of the image display unit 12 the second screen While transitioning from the screen 105 b to the third screen 105 c, the scenario progress presentation is progressed stepwise little by little to the final stage (the constellation completed state).

  On the other hand, when the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the operation is not the long press operation although the operation to the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) is performed, the display screen of the image display 12 is displayed State (blank part (unlit star)) that the progress degree of scenario progress presentation (the progress degree to the completion of constellation) is smaller than when long press operation is performed while making transition from 2 screen 105 b to 4 th screen 105 d Progress to the more FIG. 26 illustrates an example in which the progress degree from the state of the second screen 105 b to the completion of the constellation is not changed when the long press operation is not performed. Even when the long press operation is not performed, the degree of progress from the state of the second screen 105b to the completion of the constellation may be changed.

On the other hand, if the operation of the operation button 6 by the player has not been performed, the second stage the performance control unit 76, the initial display screen of the image display unit 12 after the lapse of the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} A transition is made from the screen 105a to the fifth screen 105e. In the fifth screen 105e, without appearance meteor into the screen of the image display device 12, and long press it has been added to the long press operation guidance image with time manipulation remaining display accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} Only will be reduced. When the addition operation acceptance lifetime operation pushes without performing long for the operation buttons ₆ (T3 1 ~T4) has elapsed, the second stage the performance control unit 76, the display screen of the image display unit 12 from the fifth screen 105e 6 Transition to screen 105 f. In this sixth screen 105f, meteor into the screen of the image display device 12 does not appear, only the remaining display long-pressing operation acceptance lifetime that is added to the operation guidance image hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} becomes further reduced It is displayed in the That is, when the long press operation is not performed, the second stage scenario progress presentation 105 does not proceed.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the second stage scenario progress presentation 105 is started and timing T4 is reached, the second stage presentation control unit 76 starts the final result notification presentation 106 of the scenario progress presentation. That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the success effect 107, the failure effect 108 or the failure effect 109.

  FIG. 27 shows an aspect of the success effect 107 in the second stage effect. When the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the success effect 107 after the second stage scenario progress effect 105, the first stage effect controller 107 turns on all the stars constituting the RUSH constellation to indicate that the scenario progress effect has reached the final stage. The screen 107 a is displayed on the image display 12, and then the second screen 107 b indicating that the RUSH constellation has been completed is displayed on the image display 12. In this case, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2 after the end of the scenario effect pattern 78.

  FIG. 28A shows one mode of the failure effect 108 in the second stage effect. When the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the failure effect 108 after the second stage scenario progress effect 105, it does not turn on all the stars constituting the RUSH constellation, and that the scenario progress effect has not reached the final stage After displaying the first screen 108 a shown on the image display 12, the second screen 108 b showing that the completion of the RUSH constellation has failed is displayed on the image display 12. In this case, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the same as before, except that the resurrection effect 110 is performed after the failure effect 109 described later.

  On the other hand, FIG. 28 (b) shows an aspect when the resurrection effect 110 is performed after the failure effect 109. When the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the failure effect 109 after the second stage scenario progress effect 105, after a predetermined time has elapsed while the second screen 109b of the failure effect 109 is displayed on the image display 12, , Perform a resurrection production 110. When the resurrection effect 110 is performed, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special game state ST2 after the end of the scenario effect pattern 78, as in the case where the scenario progress effect has reached the final stage.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a waveform example of the operation signal SGN output from the operation button 6 in the long press operation reception effective period in the second stage effect period.

FIG. 29 (a) operating the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) button 6 (movable member 6a) is operated by the player, the operation state operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) It is a waveform example at the time of continuing to completion | finish timing T4. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the long press operation has been performed if the operation time (continuous operation time) in which the operation state is continued is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. More specifically, the second stage the performance control unit 76, one-base hit press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) in on in - off edge between ON signal counter (RAM 33c of the on-signal count storage unit first storage 69d It is determined that the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or more than the predetermined time when the count number after the detection of the on edge becomes a predetermined number with reference to the area), so it is determined that the long press operation is performed. Such determination of the long press operation is performed commonly to the first scenario effect patterns A to F.

Figure 29 (b) is a waveform example of a case where a plurality of times of one-base hit pressing operation on the operation button 6 to the operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} in the long press was performed. In the present embodiment, and an operation of the plurality of times is made to the operation button 6 to the operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} in the hold as shown in FIG. 29 (b), usually, long press operation Is determined to have not been performed, the long press operation is performed on the condition that the operation information for the operation button 6 satisfies, for example, specific conditions (1) to (3) described below. Perform the same processing as in the case of

Specific conditions (1), within the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4),} is that the total operation time for the operation button 6 is longer than a predetermined time. To explain with reference to the waveform example of FIG. 29 (b), the operation time (T3 ₁₁ , T3 ₁₂ , T3 ₁₃ ,, etc.) of each single hit operation (1) to (6) in plural single hit operations on the operation button 6 T3 ₁₄ , T 3 ₁₅ , T 3 ₁₆ ) are sequentially added (T 3 ₁₁ + T 3 ₁₂ + T 3 ₁₃ + T 3 ₁₄ + T 3 ₁₅ + T 3 ₁₆ ), and when the total operation time exceeds a predetermined time, long press operation is Perform the same process as when it was done. More specifically, the second stage the performance control unit 76, a one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) in the cumulative ON signal counter in (second storage area of the on-signal count storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c) When the count number reaches a predetermined number, the same processing as in the case where the long press operation is performed is performed. In other words, the second stage the performance control unit 76, whether the operation accepted lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is completed, until it is determined that the press and hold operation, the operation button 6 is operated The entire time is sequentially added, and this is used to determine whether or not the operation is equivalent to that performed when the long press operation is performed. Such determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern A, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns B to F.

Certain conditions (2), within the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4),} a first sum of the operation time of the predetermined condition is satisfied operation of the operation of the operation button 6 is more than a predetermined time It is a certain thing. As the “operation satisfying the first predetermined condition” in the specific condition (2), for example, (1) when the operation button 6 is operated a predetermined number of times (including one), the subsequent operation buttons 6 operation (2) operation for a specific time _(T3 1 to T3 ₃₎ the operation button 6 after elapsed from the start timing T3 ₁ long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) for, (3) the operation button The operation time among the operations for 6 is a continuation operation for a specific time or more.

As for the determination based on the first predetermined condition (1), for example, the case where the predetermined number of operations for the operation button 6 is two will be described with reference to the waveform example in FIG. Since the first predetermined condition (1) is satisfied when 1) and (2) are performed, the continuous operation time (T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₄ ) for the operation button 6 after the single hit / push operation (2) is performed. , T3 ₁₅ , T3 ₁₆ ) are sequentially added (T 3 ₁₃ + T 3 ₁₄ + T 3 ₁₅ + T 3 ₁₆ ), and the total operation time is determined depending on whether it is a predetermined time or more. More specifically, the second stage the performance control unit 76, the accumulated ON signal counter (second storage area of the on-signal count storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c) through the operation acceptance lifetime _(T3 1 to T4) in the hold Refer to, when the increment number of the count number after the single hit pressing operation (2) becomes a predetermined number, it is determined that it is an operation to perform processing equivalent to that when long pressing operation is performed, while long pressing when the number of increase of the count number at the end timing T4 operation receiving lifetime (T3 1 _{to T4)} is less than a predetermined number, when not in operation carries out the same processing as when long press operation at long press operation is performed judge. In such determination, the count number at the time when the single-push operation (2) is performed is stored as an initial value, and a value obtained by subtracting the initial value from the count number updated thereafter is a predetermined number Update (increment) of the cumulative on signal number counter is started from the time when the single push operation (2) is performed, and the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter is a predetermined number. You may go by judging whether it is. In other words, the second stage the performance control unit 76, one-base hit pressing operation a predetermined times (e.g., twice) performed since, whether the operation accepted lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is completed, long press operation Until it is determined that there is, all the time during which the operation button 6 is operated is sequentially added, and it is determined whether or not the operation to perform the same processing as when the long press operation is performed is performed. Use for judgment. Such determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern B, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A and C to F.

Determination based on the first predetermined condition (2), when explained with reference to a waveform example of FIG. 29 (b), the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) of the start timing T3 ₁ from a specific time ( T3 ₁ to T3 ₃₎ for is that at the timing T3 ₃ has elapsed the first predetermined condition (2) is satisfied, one-base hit pressed (2) after the operation button 6 operation time for _(T3 13, _{T3 14} , T3 ₁₅ , T3 ₁₆ ) are sequentially added (T 3 ₁₃ + T 3 ₁₄ + T 3 ₁₅ + T 3 ₁₆ ), and the total operation time is determined depending on whether it is a predetermined time or more. More specifically, the second stage the performance control unit 76, the accumulated ON signal counter (second storage area of the on-signal count storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c) through the operation acceptance lifetime _(T3 1 to T4) in the hold reference, while determines that the increased number of timing T3 ₃ after the number of counts there is an operation for performing processing that is equivalent to the case where long press operation it when it becomes the predetermined number has been performed, long press operation accepting valid when the period (T3 1 _{to T4)} increase in the number of counts in the end timing T4 of less than a predetermined number, it determines that neither the operation performs the same processing as when long press operation at long press operation is performed. In such a determination, stores the counted number as an initial value at timing T3 _3, to a value obtained by subtracting the initial value from the count number to be updated then it may be determined whether a predetermined number, starts updating of the accumulated oN signal counter (increment) at the timing T3 _3, counts the cumulative oN signal number counter may determine whether a predetermined number. In other words, until the second stage the performance control unit 76, after reaching the timing T3 _3, or operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is finished, is determined that the press and hold operation is All the time during which the operation button 6 is operated is sequentially added, and this is used to determine whether or not an operation to perform the same process as when the long press operation is performed is performed. Such determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern C, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A, B, and D to F.

The determination based on the first predetermined condition (3) is performed by sequentially adding those in which the continuous operation time to the operation button 6 is longer than the specific time and the total operation time is longer than the predetermined time. It will be. For example, referring to waveform example of FIG. 29 (b), the the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4), one-base hit pressing operation (1), is continued operating time of (2) and (6) If it is less than the specific time and the continuous operation time of the single push operation (3), (4) and (5) is more than the specific time, the single push operation (3), (4) and (5) It will satisfy the predetermined condition (3) of 1. Therefore, the second stage effect control unit 76 sequentially adds the operation times (T3 ₁₃ , T3 ₁₄ , T3 ₁₅ ) of the single-pushing operations (3), (4) and (5) (T3 ₁₃ + T3 ₁₄ + T3). ₁₅ ) Whether or not the total operation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time determines whether or not an operation to perform the same processing as when the long press operation is performed is performed. More specifically, the second stage the performance control unit 76, a long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) on in the - OFF edge between ON signal counter (RAM 33c of the on-signal count first memory storage unit 69d Referring to region), until off edge is detected while determines that the continuous operating time is a specific time at the time the count reaches a specific number, or a long press operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} The number of ON signals is added until the end timing T4, and the number of ON signals is stored in the RAM 33c. When the number of ON signals whose continuous operation time is a specific time is already stored in the RAM 33c, the number of ON signals currently stored is updated to the count number obtained by adding the current number of ON signals, and then the off edge is generated. There before detection, or by adding the end timing T4 number of oN signals to the long press operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} to update the count. On the other hand, when the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is less than the predetermined number and the off edge is detected, the continuation operation time is less than the specific time, and therefore the addition is not performed as the operation time. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs an operation that performs the same processing as when the long press operation is performed when the total number of ON signals for which the continuous operation time is the specified time or more becomes the predetermined number or more. It is determined that there was a Such determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern D, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A to C, E, and F.

  Another example of the determination based on the first predetermined condition (3) is that the continuous operation time with respect to the operation button 6 is sequentially added with the specific operation time or more and the continuous operation time is less than the specific time Is performed after a predetermined multiple (more than one) of the continuous operation time is added, and it is performed depending on whether the total operation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Such determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern E, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A to D and F.

Certain conditions (3), the operation acceptance lifetime (T3 1 _{to T4)} in the hold, the elapsed time since satisfies a second predetermined condition is not less than a predetermined time. As the “second predetermined condition” in the specific condition (3), for example, that a single hit operation has been performed, a plurality of single hit operations (continuous hit operation) has been performed, and long press operation acceptance the validity period _(T3 1 to T4) specific time from the start of the _(T3 1 _{~T3 3)} has elapsed, and the like. Here, with the single-press operation under the specific condition (3), at least an operation in which an on-edge is detected, an operation in which an off-edge is detected, or an on-edge and an off edge are detected. Is an operation less than a predetermined time. Such determination is performed only in the first scenario effect pattern F, and is not performed in the other first scenario effect patterns A to E.

Thus, in the present embodiment, and an operation of the plurality of times is made to the operation button 6 to the operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} in the hold, normally, a long press operation is not performed Even if it is determined, it is determined that an operation to perform the same process as when the long press operation is performed is performed on the condition that the operation state of the operation button 6 satisfies the specific condition. Therefore, even when a plurality of single-pushing operations such as continuous hitting and pressing which are not normally determined to be long-pressing operations are performed, processing equivalent to the case where long-pressing operations are performed may be performed. In this case, an effect to be performed is performed on the condition that the long press operation is performed. Specifically, referring to the mode shown in FIG. 26, if it is determined that the long press operation has not been performed when a plurality of single press operations are performed, the display of the image display 12 is displayed. The screen changes from the second screen 105 b to the fourth screen 105 d. On the other hand, the display screen changes from the second screen 105 b to the third screen 105 c when it is determined that the operation to perform the same process as in the case where the long press operation is performed is performed. That is, by assuming that a long press operation is performed when a plurality of single press operations are performed, a scenario progress presentation which is not normally performed by a plurality of single press operations is performed at the final stage (star sign completion state The effect is to be made to progress gradually little by little). Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, it is possible to suppress the loss of the interest in the effect of advancing with the long press operation.

(First scenario progress presentation control process)
Next, the processing procedure in the effect control board 33 when the first scenario progress effect based on the first scenario effect pattern 781 is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 53. FIGS. 30 to 53 are flowcharts showing an example of the first scenario progression presentation control process in the case where the scenario progression presentation based on the first scenario presentation pattern 781 is performed in the presentation control board 33.

  The first scenario progress presentation control process corresponds to the first scenario presentation pattern 781 including the first stage presentation 100, the suggested presentation 103, and the second stage presentation 104, and includes a first stage presentation control process, a suggested presentation control process, and The second stage effect control process is included. The first stage effect control process, the suggested effect control process, and the second stage effect control process are respectively executed by the first stage effect control unit 75, the suggestion effect control unit 74, and the second stage effect control unit 76.

  Specifically, when the first scenario progress rendering process based on the first scenario rendering pattern 781 is started, the rendering control board 33 first causes the first stage rendering control unit 75 to function, as shown in FIG. If it becomes timing T0 which starts 1 step production 100 (YES in Step S1100), the 1st step production control processing by the 1st step production control part 75 will be started (Step S1101). After that, when the timing T2 at which the suggestion effect 103 starts (YES in step S1102), the effect control board 33 causes the suggestion effect control unit 74 to function and causes the suggestion effect control unit 74 to start the suggestion effect 103 (step S1103). . After that, when it is time T3 to start the second stage effect 104 (YES in step S1104), the effect control board 33 causes the second stage effect control unit 76 to function, and the second stage effect by the second stage effect control unit 76 Step 104 is started (step S1105). Then, when the process by the second stage effect control unit 76 ends, the first scenario progress effect control process ends.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a detailed processing procedure of the first stage effect control process (step S1101 in FIG. 30). When this process is started (step S1200), the first stage effect control unit 75 starts a process of causing the image display 12 to display the title display 101 (step S1201). Thereafter, when the predetermined time has elapsed and timing T1 comes (YES in step S1202), the first stage effect control unit 75 starts the first stage scenario effect progression process (step S1203).

  FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 are flowcharts showing the detailed processing procedure of the first stage scenario presentation progress processing (step S 1203 in FIG. 31). Specifically, FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a determination example of the operation on the operation button 6 in the first stage effect control process (step S1203 in FIG. 31). FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the effect execution method in the first stage effect control process (step S1203 in FIG. 31).

As shown in FIG. 32, the first stage performance control unit 75, when the start of the first stage scenario effect development processing a predetermined time becomes time T1 ₁ has elapsed, starting a one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity by the player (YES in step S1300). Thereafter, the first stage performance control unit 75 determines whether or not one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 to T1 ₂₎ has elapsed (step S1301), one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 to T1 ₂ When the) has not elapsed (NO in step S1301), it is determined whether an on-edge has been detected (step S1302). That is, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) has been operated by referring to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b in the RAM 33c. Such determination of whether on-edge is detected, it is determined that on-edge until it is determined to have been detected (YES in step S1302), or one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 ~T1 ₂₎ has elapsed Are repeated (YES in step S1301).

If it is determined that the on-edge is detected within the single-push operation reception valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) (YES in step S1302), the first stage effect control unit 75 selects the on signal count number storage unit 69d in the RAM 33c. It is determined whether the number of ON signals (count number of ON signal number counter between ON and OFF edges) stored in one storage area is a predetermined number (step S1303). That is, when it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 6 by the detection of the on-edge (YES in step S1302), the first-stage effect control unit 75 determines the on-off-edge on signal count counter based on the count number. It is determined whether the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Here, the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges (the number of on signals stored in the first storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d) is set every predetermined time by the operation control unit 66 as described above. For example, since it is updated in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds, the operation is performed by the on signal number counter between on and off edges (the number of signals stored in the first storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d). The continuous operation time for the button 6 can be grasped. Therefore, when the first stage effect control unit 75 determines that the count number of the on signal edge counter in the on / off edge of the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, the player operates the operation button 6 It can be determined whether the operation is a single push operation or a long push operation.

If it is determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is not a predetermined number (NO in step S1302), that is, if it can be determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is less than a predetermined number, 1-step effect control unit 75, one-base hit press operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 to T1 ₂₎ it is determined whether the elapsed (step S1304). And if one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 1 to T1 ₂₎ it has not elapsed (NO in step S1304), off-edge is determined whether or not detected (step S1305). If the off edge is not detected (NO in step S1305), the first stage effect control unit 75 returns to step S1303 and determines whether the on / off edge on signal number counter has a predetermined count (step S1303). YES), until it is determined that the single-push operation acceptance valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed after detection of the on edge (YES in step S1304), or it is determined that the off edge is detected (YES in step S1305) The determinations in steps S1303 to S1305 described above are repeated.

On the other hand, when detecting the OFF EDGE (YES in step S1305), or if the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period after the detection of the on edge _(T1 1 _{~T1 2)} has elapsed (YES in step S1304), the as shown in FIG. 33 The one-step effect control unit 75 determines the progress step from the first step (the lighting pattern of "with operation" in FIG. 21B) (step S1306) and performs the first-step scenario effect execution process (step S1308) . That is, when detecting the OFF EDGE (YES in step S1305), or if the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period after the detection of the on edge _(T1 1 _{~T1 2)} has elapsed (YES in step S1304), the on - counting off-edge between counter It can be determined that the number is less than the predetermined number (the continuous operation time is less than the predetermined time). Therefore, the first stage effect control unit 75 can determine that the single push operation has been performed, and therefore determines the progress stage from the first stage (the lighting pattern of “operation is present” in FIG. 21B) (step S1306). .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, when it is determined that the count number of the on / off edge counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S1303), it is determined that the continuous operation time for operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. Since it is possible, it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33, the first stage effect control unit 75 proceeds to the first stage (the lighting pattern of “operation is present” in FIG. 21B), as in the case where the single-press operation is performed. It decides from (step S1306).

  It should be noted that to which stage the scenario progress effect is to be advanced may be determined in advance by performing the single push operation, for example, determined immediately after the processing based on the scenario effect pattern 78 is started. It is also good.

On the other hand, when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S1302) and the single-push operation reception valid period (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) has elapsed (YES in step S1301), the first stage effect control unit 75 is shown in FIG. As shown in 33, the progression stage is determined to be the minimum progression width (step S1307). That is, when it is determined that the on-edge has not been detected (NO in step S1302) and it is determined that the operation button 6 has not been operated (YES in step S1301), the first stage effect control unit 75 starts the first stage The progression stage is determined as the minimum progression width (lighting pattern of “no operation” in FIG. 21B) without determination (step S1307).

  Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs a first stage scenario effect progression process of advancing the scenario progress effect to the stage determined in step S1306 or step S1307 (step S1308). Specifically, while making a large number of meteors appear in the screen of the image display 12, the empty space portions of the stars constituting the RUSH constellation are filled in the predetermined order up to the stage determined in step S1306 or step S1307. As a result, if the player performs a single-press operation or a long-press operation, the scenario to complete the RUSH constellation proceeds to the first stage, and if the operation by the player is not received, the RUSH constellation is completed. The scenario progresses by the minimum advance width. This is the end of the first stage effect control process.

  FIG. 34 to FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing another example of the first stage scenario presentation control process (step S1101 in FIG. 30) in the first stage presentation control process.

In the example shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, determination of the presence or absence of the one-base hit press operation and long press operation of the operation button 6 in one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} is directed first stage scenario shown in FIG. 32 It is done in the same way as the rule progression law. On the other hand, demonstration execution method when (YES in step S1303), which can be determined that the long press operation on the operation button 6 is performed in the one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime _(T1 1 to T1 ₂₎ comprises a first stage scenario shown in FIG. 33 It differs from the presentation execution method in the presentation system progression theory.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 34, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when it can be determined that the single push operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1304 or S1305), the first stage effect control unit 75 The progress stage is determined from the first stage (the lighting pattern of "operation is present" in FIG. 21B) (step S1310). If it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed on operation button 6 (YES in step S1303) or if it is determined that the operation button 6 has not been operated (YES in step S1301), the first stage effect control The section 75 determines the advancing stage to be the minimum advancing width (the lighting pattern of “no operation” in FIG. 21B) (step S1311). That is, when it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed, the first stage effect control unit 75 processes that the long press operation and the single hit and press operation have not been performed (assuming no operation).

  Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs a first stage scenario effect progression process of advancing the scenario progress effect to the stage determined in step S1310 or step S1311 (step S1312). As a result, if the single-press operation by the player is accepted, the scenario for completing the RUSH constellation proceeds to the first stage, and if the single-push operation by the player is not accepted, or the long-press operation is accepted. For example, the scenario to complete the RUSH constellation proceeds by the minimum advance width. This is the end of the first stage effect control process.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 35, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when it can be determined that the single push operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1304 or S1305), the first stage effect control unit 75 Are determined from the first step (the lighting pattern of "operation is present" in FIG. 21B) (step S1320). If it is determined that no operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1301), the first stage effect control unit 75 sets the progression stage to the minimum progression width (“no operation” in FIG. 21B). The lighting pattern is determined (step S1322). Furthermore, if it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1303), the first stage effect control unit 75 determines a special effect (step S1321). That is, when it is determined that the long press operation has been performed, the first stage effect control unit 75 processes that the long press operation and the single hit and press operation are not performed (as it is a special operation). Here, the “special effect” determined in step S1321 means an effect that is different from the effect performed with the progress stage determined in step S1320 and step S1322. As the "special presentation", for example, the stage of progression is determined in the same manner as in step S1320 or step S1322, and an aspect causing a meteor not to appear or a meteor appears when filling the empty space of the star constituting the RUSH constellation. There are different effects and effects (for example, cut-in effect, mini character effect, blackout effect, effect of displaying the degree of expectation as a percentage) different from the effect of filling in the blank part of the star constituting the RUSH constellation. In addition, as "special rendition", in place of filling the blank part of the star that constitutes the RUSH constellation, or in addition to filling the blank part, the drive of the movable character 14, the lamp 9 and the board ramp 14a blinks, lights up, or turns off. Of course, effects other than the special effects exemplified above may be executed.

  Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 advances the scenario progress effect with the minimum progress width determined in step S1322 up to the first step determined in step S1320 or executes the special effect determined in step S1321. . This is the end of the first stage effect control process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation determination on the operation button 6 in the first stage scenario progression effect control process based on the first scenario effect pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 36, continuous hit operation is accepted in a predetermined continuous hit operation reception effective period, and it is determined that continuous hit operation on the operation button 6 and long press operation in the active hit period are determined. This is different from the operation determination method in the first stage scenario rendering system progression logic shown in FIG. That is, whereas determining the presence or absence of one-base hit press operation and long press operation of the operation button 6 in one-base hit pressing operation acceptance period (T1 1 _{to T1 2)} in the first stage scenario effect development processing shown in FIG. 32, FIG. 36 in the example shown, it determines the presence or absence of barrage pressed and long press operation of the operation button 6 in battered press operation reception period corresponding to a one-base hit pressing operation accepting period _(T1 1 ~T1 _2). On the other hand, the effect executing method in the case where it can be determined that continuous pressing operation or long pressing operation on the operation button 6 has been performed in the continuous pressing operation reception effective period is the example shown in FIG. 33 or the other shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. In the following, a case will be described in which the example shown in FIG. 33 is adopted as an effect execution method when it can be determined that the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation has been performed.

As shown in FIG. 36, the first stage performance control unit 75, when the start of the first stage effect control process a predetermined time becomes time T1 ₁ has elapsed, starts pummel pressing operation accepting validity by the player (YES in step S1400). After that, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the continuous hitting operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (step S1401), and if the continuous hitting operation acceptance valid period has not passed (NO in step S1401), It is determined whether an on-edge has been detected (step S1402). That is, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) has been operated by referring to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b in the RAM 33c. It is determined whether such an on-edge has been detected until it is determined that an on-edge has been detected (YES in step S1402), or until it is determined that the continuous pressing operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (YES in step S1401). ), Repeated.

  If it is determined that the on-edge is detected within the continuous hit / push operation acceptance valid period (YES in step S1402), first-stage effect control unit 75 stores the first signal in count-on signal count number storage unit 69d in RAM 33c. With reference to the number of on signals, it is determined whether the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is a predetermined number (step S1403). That is, when it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 6 by the detection of the on edge, the first stage effect control unit 75 refers to the count number of the on signal number counter between the on and off edges to make the operation button 6 It is determined whether or not the long press operation on the key has been performed.

  If it is determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is not a predetermined number (NO in step S1403), that is, if it can be determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is less than a predetermined number, One-step effect control unit 75 determines whether the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter (the number of on-edges stored in the second storage area of on-edge count number storage unit 69c in RAM 33c is a predetermined number (for example, "2") If the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S1404), the first stage effect control unit 75 determines that the continuous hitting operation acceptance valid period has elapsed. (YES in step S1401), the on / off edge count of the on signal number counter is predetermined Or determined to be (YES in step S1403), or the accumulated number of on-edge counter until it is determined that the predetermined number (YES in step S1404), the determination in step S1401~S1404 described above is repeated.

  On the other hand, if the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S1404), or the count number of the on-off-edge number on signal counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S1403), the first step As shown in FIG. 33, the effect control unit 75 determines the progressing stage from the first stage (the lighting pattern of “with operation” in FIG. 21B) (step S1306). That is, when the continuous pressing operation or the long pressing operation is performed, the progressing stage is determined to be the first stage (step S1306).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36, when the continuous pressing and holding operation is not performed on operation button 6 (YES in step S1403 or step S1404), the continuous pressing and receiving effective period has elapsed (step Since it can be determined that the operation button 6 has not been operated, or that a single hit operation has been performed on the operation button 6, as shown in FIG. The advancing step is determined to be the minimum advancing width (lighting pattern of "no operation" in FIG. 21B) (step S1307).

  Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs a first stage scenario effect progression process of advancing the scenario progress effect to the stage determined in step S1306 or step S1307 (step S1308). As a result, if the player continuously accepts the continuous pressing operation or the long pressing operation on the operation button 6, the scenario for completing the RUSH constellation proceeds to the first stage, and the operation by the player can not be accepted, or a single hit is performed. If the operation is done, the scenario to complete the RUSH constellation proceeds by the minimum travel width. This is the end of the first stage effect control process.

  In addition, although the example shown in FIG. 33 was demonstrated about the production | presentation execution method after determining the presence or absence of continuous hit operation and long press operation, about the said production | presentation execution method, the production | presentation execution shown as another example in FIG. It may be a method or other. In the case of the effect execution method shown as another example in FIG. 34 or FIG. 35, when the first step effect control unit 75 can determine that the long press operation has been performed, it is assumed that there is no long press operation and single hit operation (no operation Alternatively, it may be processed as it is a special operation, and the same effect as in the case of no operation may be performed, or a special effect may be performed.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart of an example of a detailed process procedure of the suggestion effect control process (step S1103 in FIG. 30).

  When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect control processing, it first refers to the result of the special game determination made by the special game determination unit 52 (step S1500), and based on the special game determination result, a plurality of characters 80a , 80b is selected from the four patterns shown in FIG. 23B, and the selected serif pattern is determined as a serif pattern to be performed as the suggested effect 103 (step S1501). At this time, if the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets, for example, three patterns of the second pattern, the third pattern and the fourth pattern as selection candidates, The third pattern is selected with higher probability than the second pattern, and the fourth pattern is selected with higher probability than the third pattern. Further, when the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets, for example, three patterns of the first pattern, the second pattern and the third pattern as selection candidates, and the third pattern The second pattern is selected more frequently, and the first pattern is selected with higher probability than the second pattern. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines the speech pattern to be performed as the suggestion effect 103 as described above, based on the speech pattern and the presence or absence of the single push operation on the operation button 6 by the player, as shown in FIG. The suggested effect 103 as shown is started (step S1502).

  FIG.38 and FIG.39 is a flowchart which shows an example of a detailed process sequence of suggestion production progress processing (step S1502 of FIG. 37). In this suggestion effect progression process, three single-press operation reception effective periods are provided, and in each single-push operation reception effective period, the presence or absence of a single-push operation and a long-press operation is determined. And the determination method of the presence or absence of long press operation is the same as that of the case of the 1st step scenario production advance processing explained with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when the suggestion effect progression process is started at timing T2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 first sets “3” in the reception operation counter of the RAM 33 c (step S1600). That is, the reception of the single hit operation is performed three times within the suggested effect period (T2 to T3). The number to be set in the reception operation counter may be set according to the number of receptions of the single hit operation to be executed. Then, the suggestion effect control unit 74 selects one speech effect pattern from the first to fourth speech effect patterns (step S1601).

  After that, the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts receiving a single-press operation (step S1602), and then subtracts “1” from the value of the reception operation counter (step S1603). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 subtracts “1” from the value of the reception operation counter each time the reception of the single push operation is started.

  Next, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the single-press operation acceptance valid period corresponding to the count number of the acceptance operation counter has elapsed (step S1604), and the single-push operation acceptance valid period has elapsed. If it is not determined (NO in step S1604), it is determined whether an on-edge is detected (step S1605). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the operation button 6 (the movable body 6a) has been operated by referring to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b in the RAM 33c. It is determined whether such an on-edge has been detected until it is determined that an on-edge has been detected (YES in step S1605), or until it is determined that the single hit operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (step S1604). YES), repeated.

  When it is determined that the on-edge is detected within the single-press operation acceptance valid period (YES in step S1605), the suggestion effect control unit 74 stores the on signal count number stored in the first storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d in the RAM 33c. It is determined whether the count number of the on-off signal count counter between off-edges is a predetermined number (step S1606). That is, when it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 6 based on the detection of the on edge (YES in step S1605), the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines the operation button based on the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges. It is determined whether the continuous operation time for 6 is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 6 by determining whether the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges of the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number. It can be determined whether the operation is a single push operation or a long push operation.

  If it is determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is not a predetermined number (NO in step S1606), that is, if it can be determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is less than a predetermined number, The effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the single hit operation accepting valid period has elapsed (step S1607). Then, if the single hit operation acceptance valid period has not elapsed after the detection of the on edge (NO in step S1607), it is determined whether the off edge is detected (step S1608). If the off edge is not detected (NO in step S1608), the suggested effect control unit 74 returns to step S1606, and determines whether the on / off edge on signal number counter has a predetermined count (YES in step S1606) ) Until it is determined that the single-push operation acceptance valid period has elapsed after detection of the on-edge (YES in step S1607), or until it is determined that the off-edge is detected (YES in step S1608), the above-described steps S1606 to S1606 The determination of S1608 is repeated.

  On the other hand, when the off edge is detected (YES in step S1608), or when the single hit operation acceptance valid period has elapsed after the detection of the on edge (YES in step S1607), the continuous operation time for operation button 6 is less than the predetermined time Since it can be determined that a single-press operation has been performed, as shown in FIG. 39, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a speech effect execution process (step S1610). Thereafter, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the count number of the reception operation counter is “0” (step S1611).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38, when it is determined that the count number of the on / off edge counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S1606), it is determined that the continuous operation time for operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. Since it is possible, it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6. Therefore, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the long press operation flag (step S1609), and then, as shown in FIG. 39, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the count number of the reception operation counter is “0”. It is determined (step S1611).

  Here, the "long press operation flag" is referred to in step S1700 (FIG. 40) of the speech effect execution process in the suggested effect described later. That is, when the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 in at least one period of the single hit pressing operation reception valid period (1) to (3) of the suggestion effect and the “long press operation flag” is set, the single hit pressing The execution of the speech effect for the operation of the operation button 6 in the operation reception valid period is restricted, and the execution of the speech effect for the operation of the operation button 6 in the single hit operation reception valid period after the single hit operation reception valid period is restricted. Ru. The "long press operation flag" is also referred to in step S2208 or S2211 (FIG. 45) of the final result notification effect execution process in the second step effect described later. That is, when the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 in at least one period of the single hit pressing operation reception valid period (1) to (3) of the suggested effect, and the “long press operation flag” is set, the second step Execution of the success effect 107 of the final result notification effect execution process in the effect is restricted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38, when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S1605) and the single hit operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (YES in step S1604), the suggestion effect control unit 74 receives the accepting operation counter. It is determined whether the count number of is "0" (step S1611). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the three-time single-press operation acceptance valid period has ended.

  If it is determined that the count number of the reception operation counter is not “0” (YES in step S1611), the suggestion effect control unit 74 returns to step S1602 of FIG. 38, and performs the determination of step S1602 of FIG. The process is repeated until it is determined in S1611 that the count number of the reception operation counter is “0” (YES in step S1611).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the details of the speech effect execution process in the suggested effect progression process (step S1610 in FIG. 39).

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the speech effect execution process is started, first, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the long press operation flag is set (step S1700). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the long press operation on the operation button 6 is performed in the single hit operation reception period of the suggested effect 103 and the single hit operation reception valid period before that. If the long press operation flag is not set (NO in S1700), the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the second speech effect has been performed (step S1701). If the second speech effect has not been performed (NO in step S1701), the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the first speech effect has been performed (step S1702), and the first speech effect is generated. If the command has not been executed (NO in step S1702), the first speech effect is executed (step S1703). That is, when the long press operation on the operation button 6 is not performed in the single push operation reception period of the suggestion effect and the single push operation reception effective period before that (NO in step S1700), the first serif effect and the second When none of the dialogue effects of is performed (NO in step S1701 and step S1702), the first dialogue effect is executed (step S1703).

  When the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S1700), the second speech effect is not executed (NO in step S1701), and when the first speech is already executed (step S1702) YES) and the suggested effect control unit 74 execute the second speech effect (step S1704).

  Furthermore, if the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S1700), and the second speech effect is being executed (YES in step S1701), the suggested presentation control unit 74 executes the third speech effect (Step S1705).

  On the other hand, when the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S1700), the dialogue effect execution is performed without executing any of the dialogue effects of the first speech effect, the second speech effect, and the third speech effect. End the process. When the speech effect execution process ends, when the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the value of the reception operation counter is “0” (YES in step S1604), the suggestion effect process ends.

  FIG.41 and FIG.42 is a flowchart which shows the other example of the suggestion production advance processing in the suggestion production control processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, the determination of the presence or absence of the single push operation and the long press operation on the operation button 6 in the single push operation reception effective period is performed in the same manner as the suggested effect system progression shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, the effect execution method when it can be determined that the long press operation on the operation button 6 has been performed in the single-push press operation acceptance valid period (YES in step S1606) This is different from the presentation execution method in the one-stage scenario presentation system progression rule.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 41, in the example shown in FIG. 38, if it can be determined that a single-push operation has been performed on operation button 6 (YES in step S1607 or S1608), or it is determined that a long-press operation has been performed. If it is possible (YES in step S1606), the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a speech effect execution process (step S1800). That is, in the suggestion effect progression process of this example, it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed, not only when it can be determined that the single push operation has been performed on the operation button 6 in the single press operation reception period (YES in step S1607 or S1608). Also in the case (YES in step S1606), the speech effect is performed.

  Here, the speech effect execution process of this example is performed basically in the same manner as the speech effect process shown in FIG. However, in the speech effect execution process, when the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6, the first speech effect, the second speech effect, and the third speech effect are performed similarly to the case where the single push operation is performed. Since one of the above is executed, the determination as to whether the long press operation flag is set in step S1700 is omitted.

  Then, the suggested effect control unit 74 performs steps S1602 to S1609 shown in FIG. 38 and step S1800 shown in FIG. 41 until it is determined that the reception operation counter is “0” in S1801 in FIG. 41 (YES in step S1801). S1801 is repeated, and when it is determined that the reception operation counter is “0” (YES in step S1801), the suggestion effect processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 42, in the example shown in FIG. 38, when it can be determined that the single push operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1607 or S1608), a speech effect execution process is performed (step S1900). The speech effect execution process of this example is performed in the same manner as the speech effect process shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in the example shown in FIG. 38 that the long press operation has been performed on the operation button 6 (YES in step S1606), the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs special speech effect execution processing (step S1901). As the special speech effect, for example, the characters 80a and 80b emit special serifs (for example, "long press!", "Single hit!") Not defined in the first to fourth serif patterns. An effect is mentioned. As special serif effects other than such effects, for example, a mini character other than the effect that makes the text color of the serif, the color of the serif frame, the color within the serif frame, the background color of the characters 80a, 80b, etc. different from normal. There are effects that the characters 80a and 80b emit words by displaying the characters 80a and 80b on the side emitting the words larger than normal. The enlargement of the character can also be performed as a cut-in effect.

  Then, until it is determined that the reception operation counter is “0” in S1902 of FIG. 42 (YES in step S1902), steps S1602 to S1609 shown in FIG. 38, and steps S1900 to S1900 shown in FIG. S 1902 is repeatedly performed, and when it is determined that the reception operation counter is “0” (YES in step S 1902), the suggestion effect processing ends.

  If it can be determined that the long press operation on the operation button 6 has been performed in the single-press operation reception period of the suggested effect, an effect different from the speech effect (for example, a cut-in effect with no speech, etc.) instead of performing the special speech effect. It may be made to execute a non-serif mini character effect, a blackout effect, and an effect of displaying the degree of expectation as a percentage.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a detailed processing procedure of the second stage effect control process (step S1105 in FIG. 30).

  When the second stage effect control process is started, the second stage effect control unit 76 performs a second stage scenario effect progression process (step S2000), and then performs a final result notification effect execution process (step S2001).

  FIG.44 and FIG.45 is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd step scenario production advance processing based on the 1st scenario production pattern A in a 1st scenario progress production control process.

The first scenario effect pattern A, a long press operation acceptance lifetime operation of the operation button 6 is added to all operating time, which is performed in the (T3 1 _{to T4),} the added value of the operating time (total operating time) Is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, as in the case where the long press operation is performed. Here, adding all the operation times is not limited to the case where the operation button 6 is continuously operated, but even when it is operated intermittently, all of the operation times related to all the operations are It means to add.

As shown in FIG. 44, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern A is made to the timing T3 ₁ to elapse, and long-press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving to start the lifetime _(T3 1 _{~T4) (YES} in step S2100).

When starting the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) (YES in step S2100), the second stage the performance control unit 76 determines whether ON-edge has been detected (step S2101), before the second On the condition that the stage scenario initial effect is not executed (NO in step S2102), the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2103).

  In this second stage scenario initial stage rendering process, while the display screen of the image display 12 is transitioned from the initial screen 105b to the second screen 105b, the stage progression stage rendering progressing degree than when the long press operation is performed ( Progress to a state where the progress to complete the constellation is less (more empty space (unlit star)). Note that it is determined whether the second stage effect control unit 76 refers to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b in the RAM 33c to determine whether the on-edge is detected (step S2001).

On the other hand, when executing the second stage scenario the initial effect (step S2103), then determines whether the operation receiving lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) has elapsed (step S2104). Similarly, even when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2101) or the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2102), the long press operation reception valid period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (step S2104).

If long-press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2104), the second stage the performance control unit 76, stored in the first storage area of the on-signal count storage unit 69d in RAM33c It is determined whether the number of ON signals (count number of ON signal number counter between ON and OFF edges) is a predetermined number (step S2105). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, based on the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the ON signal number counter in the on / off edge of the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, and thus, when the player operates the operation button 6, It can be determined whether the operation is a long press operation.

  If it is determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2105), that is, if it can be determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is less than a predetermined number, The two-stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter stored in the second storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69 d in the RAM 33 c is a predetermined number (step S 2106). Here, the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter is updated by the operation control unit 66 in the timer interrupt process executed every predetermined time (for example, every 2 milliseconds) by the effect control board 33 as described above, and the on edge is Alternatively, the sampling number of the switch-on signal is accumulated (added) irrespective of the detection of the off-edge. Therefore, the second stage effect control unit 76 refers to the count number of the cumulative ON signal number counter, and even if the operation is intermittently performed on the operation button 6, the total of the operation time ( The entire operation time can be grasped.

If the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2106), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the count number of the on signal edge counter or the cumulative on signal number counter is a predetermined number. or it is determined that there (YES in step S2105 or 2106), until it is determined that the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) has elapsed (YES in step S2104), step previously described S2104~S2106 Repeat

On the long press operation acceptance lifetime _(T3 1 _~T4) - When the count number of the off-edge between ON signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2105), the second stage the performance control unit 76, shown in FIG. 45 As described above, under the condition that the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2208), the second stage is determined as the progress stage (step S2209). This second stage is determined with reference to the effect selected as the final result notification effect described later. For example, when the success effect 107 is selected as the final result notification effect, the second stage is selected to advance to the stage where all the blank portions of the stars constituting the RUSH constellation are filled. On the other hand, in the case where the effect to perform the resurrection effect 110 after the failure effect 108 or the failure effect 109 is selected, the stage not reached at the second stage is selected. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 executes the second stage scenario effect progression process in which the empty space portion of the star is filled up in a predetermined order until the predetermined stage (step S2210), and the second stage scenario effect progression process Finish.

Similarly, if the accumulated number of the ON signal counter the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) is the predetermined number (YES in step S2106), the second stage the performance control unit 76, shown in FIG. 45 On the condition that the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2208), the second stage is determined as the progress stage (step S2209), and the second stage scenario presentation progress processing is executed (step S2210) . That is, on the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 ~T4) - When the count number of the off-edge between ON signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2105), i.e. predetermined time or longer for the operation buttons 6 Not only when the operation is performed, but also when the intermittent operation is performed on the operation button 6 which is not usually determined as the long press operation, the total operation time is not less than a predetermined time An effect of executing the long press operation as a condition is performed by performing processing equivalent to the case where the long press operation is performed (step S2210), and the second stage scenario effect progression processing is ended.

Thus, even when the accumulated value of the operating time for the operation buttons 6 on the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is longer than a predetermined time, long press continued operating time with respect to the operation button 6 is the predetermined time by processing operations and equal, battered press operation to the operation button 6 to the operation accepting lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is made, or even if the start of the operation of the operation button 6 is delayed The same effect as in the case of performing the long press operation on the operation button 6 by the continuous operation for a predetermined time or more is performed. As a result, even if the knowledge of the game method performs an operation other than the long press operation through the operation acceptance lifetime pressing length such poor player (T3 1 _{to T4),} that the press and hold operation is performed It is possible to provide the gaming machine 1 that can be enjoyed sufficiently by performing the effects to be executed on condition of

  Although the second step has been described on the premise that the final result notification effect to be described later has already been determined, the final result notification effect may be determined in the final result notification effect process, in that case The second stage may be determined depending on whether the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2.

On the other hand, on the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 _~T4) - counts off-edge between ON signal counter or the cumulative ON signal number counter even when a predetermined number (YES in step S2105 or S2106) When the long press operation flag is set in step S2208 (YES in step S2208), the minimum advancing width is determined as the advancing step (step S2212). The minimum travel width is a travel width which does not reach the second stage, and corresponds to the minimum selection width selected when it can be determined that the long press operation has been performed. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 executes the second stage scenario effect progression process in which the empty space portion of the star is filled up in a predetermined order until the predetermined stage (step S2210), and the second stage scenario effect progression process Finish.

Here, the long press operation flag is a long press operation in at least one single push operation reception valid period of three single push operation reception valid periods (1) to (3) in the suggested effect processing as described above. It is set when it is done (step S1609 in FIG. 38). Therefore, the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) on - even when the number of counts off-edge between ON signal counter or the cumulative ON signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2105 or S2106) , i.e. even if the operation that are considered long press the operation or long-pressing operation on the operation button 6 in the long-pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T3 1 _{to T4)} is made, the suggestions effect process one-base hit pressing operation accepting valid If the long press operation is performed in the periods (1) to (3), the execution of the effect in the second stage scenario progress effect is limited. That is, when the long press operation is performed in the reception period of operations other than the long press operation (for example, single hit operation or continuous hit operation) in the effect period different from the second step effect 104, the second step effect control unit 76 The long press effect in the second stage effect 104 (second stage scenario progress effect 105) may not be executed.

In contrast, the operation on the operation button 6 the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) is made, in which case the operation is not a long press operation (NO in step S2107 of FIG. 44), the second stage On the condition that the long press operation flag is not set as shown in FIG. 45 (NO in step S2211), the effect control unit 76 determines the minimum advance width as the advance stage (step S2212), and the second stage scenario The effect advancing process is executed (step S2210), and the second stage scenario effect advancing process is ended. Further, if the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2211), the second stage effect control unit 76 does not perform the determination of the progress stage and the second stage scenario effect execution processing (the process proceeds in the first stage The second stage scenario rendering progress process is ended without advancing from the stage).

Similarly, the second stage the performance control unit 76, (YES at step S2107 in FIG. 44) when the long press operation acceptance lifetime without operation at all made to the operation button 6 _(T3 1 to T4) has elapsed, advanced stages The second stage scenario presentation progressing process is ended without performing the second stage scenario presentation execution process.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing details of final result notification effect execution processing in the second stage effect control processing.

  When the final result notification effect execution process is started, the second stage effect control unit 76 first determines whether the effect selected as the final result notification effect is the success effect 107 (step S2300), and the success effect 107 If it is selected (YES in step S2300), the success effect 107 is executed. For example, the success effect 107 causes the screen display to transition from the first screen 107a on which the RUSH constellation displayed on the image display 12 in the second stage scenario rendering is completed, and the second screen 107b indicates that the RUSH constellation is completed. For example, it is performed by displaying a screen such as “composition complete!” In FIG.

  On the other hand, when the success effect 107 is not selected as the final result notification effect (NO in step S2300), it is determined whether the effect selected as the final result notification effect is the failure effect 108 (step S2302) If the effect 108 is selected (YES in step S 2302), the failure effect 108 is executed. For example, this failure representation 108 causes the RUSH constellation displayed on the image display 12 in the second stage scenario rendering to transition the screen display from the uncompleted first screen 108 a and indicates that the RUSH constellation has not been completed. This is performed by displaying the screen 108 b (for example, a screen such as “Sorry, failure!” In FIG. 29A).

  If neither the success effect 107 nor the failure effect 108 is selected as the final result notification effect (NO in step S 2302), the failure effect 109 is executed and then the resurrection effect 110 is executed (step S 2304). Similarly to the failure presentation 108 described above, this failure presentation 109 causes the screen display to transition from the uncompleted first screen 109 a of the RUSH constellation displayed on the image display 12 in the second stage scenario presentation, for example, RUSH This is performed by displaying a second screen 109 b (for example, a screen such as “Sorry, failure!” In FIG. 29B) indicating that the constellation has not been completed. On the other hand, the resurrection effect 110 is performed by displaying the third screen 110b indicating that the process is successful as a result at timing T5 when a predetermined time has elapsed after the second screen 109b is displayed.

  As described above, the resurrection effect 110 is performed after the success effect 107, the failure effect 108, or the failure effect 109, and the final result notification effect ends at timing T6.

  FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of a second stage scenario rendering progressing process based on the first scenario rendering pattern B in the first scenario progression rendering control process.

The first scenario effect pattern B adds all operations time since the repeated pressing pushing operation is performed on the operation button 6 the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4),} the added value of the operation time ( When the total operation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, processing is performed in the same manner as when the long press operation is performed. Here, adding all of the operation time is not limited to the case where the operation button 6 is operated continuously, but the operation related to all the operations after the continuous hitting operation even when the operation is performed intermittently. It means adding all of the time.

As shown in FIG. 47, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern B is made to the timing T3 ₁ to elapse, and long-press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving to start the lifetime _(T3 1 _{~T4) (YES} in step S2400).

When starting the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) (YES in step S2400), the second stage the performance control unit 76 determines whether ON-edge has been detected (step S2401), before the second On the condition that the stage scenario initial effect is not executed (NO in step S2402), the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2403).

On the other hand, when executing the second stage scenario the initial effect (step S2403), then determines whether the operation receiving lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) has elapsed (step S2404). Similarly, even when the on edge is not detected (NO in step S2401) or the on edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2402), the long press operation valid period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (step S2404).

If long-press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2404), the second stage the performance control unit 76, on which is stored in the RAM 33c - count of off-edge between ON signal counter Is a predetermined number (step S2405). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, based on the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the ON signal number counter in the on / off edge of the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, and thus, when the player operates the operation button 6, It can be determined whether the operation is a long press operation.

  When it is determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is not the predetermined number (NO in step S2405), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the count number of the cumulative on edge number counter stored in the RAM 33c is a predetermined number. It is judged whether or not it is the above (step S2406). Here, the cumulative on-edge number counter indicates the number of times the operation button 6 has been operated as described above. Therefore, the second stage effect control unit 76 can determine whether or not the continuous pressing operation has been performed on the operation button 6 by referring to the accumulated on-edge number counter. The "predetermined number" in the count number of the accumulated on-edge number counter in this case may be a number that can determine the operation on the operation button 6 as the continuous pressing operation, and is selected from an integer of 2 or more.

If (in step S2406 YES) cumulative case count on edge number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, i.e. it can be determined that the repeated pressing push operation is performed on the operation button 6 in the long-pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T3 1 _{to T4)} After the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter is a predetermined number, whether the count number of the count of the cumulative on signal number counter stored in the RAM 33c is a predetermined number It is determined whether or not it is (step S2407). The increase number of the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter is the increase number from the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter when the count number of the cumulative on edge number counter becomes a predetermined number. Therefore, the increase number of the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter stores the count number of the cumulative on-signal number counter when the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter reaches a predetermined number. The count number can be calculated by subtracting the count number of the current accumulated on signal number counter. Further, when the count number of the accumulated on-edge number counter becomes a predetermined number, the increase number may be grasped by operating a counter that counts the increase number of the accumulated on signal number.

The second stage effect control unit when the increase number of the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2407), or when the count number of the cumulative on edge number counter is less than a predetermined value (NO in step S2406) 76 determines whether the number of increases in the count number of the on signal number counter or the cumulative on signal number counter between on and off edges is a predetermined number (YES in step S2405 or 2407), or the long press operation valid period (T3). Steps S2401 to S2407 described above are repeated until it is determined that _{1 to} T4 has elapsed (YES in step S2404).

And the second stage the performance control unit 76, on the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 _~T4) - When the count number of the off-edge between ON signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2405), or battered press When the increase number of the count number of the accumulated on signal number counter after the operation is performed is a predetermined number (YES in step S2407), the long press operation flag is not set as shown in FIG. 45 (step The second step is decided as the advancing step (step S2209), and the minimum advancing width is decided as the advancing step (step S2212) when the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208).

Thus, even when the accumulated value of the operating time with respect to the operation button 6 after repeated pressing push operation on the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is longer than a predetermined time, continuous operating time with respect to the operation button 6 is given by processing the long-pressing equivalent operation is time, battered press operation to the operation button 6 to the operation accepting lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is made, or delayed the start of the operation on the operation button 6 Even in this case, the same effect as in the case where the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 by the continuous operation for a predetermined time or more is performed. As a result, even if the knowledge of the game method performs an operation other than the long press operation through the operation acceptance lifetime pressing length such poor player (T3 1 _{to T4),} the gaming machine 1 can enjoy fully Can be provided.

The second stage performance control unit 76, if it operation of the operation button 6 is made through the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} as shown in FIG. 47, not the operation is pressed for a long (step As shown in FIG. 45, when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2211), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines the minimum advance width as the progress stage (step S2212). A second stage scenario presentation execution process is performed (step S2210).

On the other hand, the second stage the performance control unit 76, when the operation of the operation button 6 has not been made through the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) as shown in FIG. 47 (YES in step S2408), in FIG. 45 As shown, without performing the determination of the progress stage and the second stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage progressed in the first stage), the second stage scenario presentation progress process is ended.

  Furthermore, the second stage effect control unit 76 terminates the first scenario progress effect control process by continuing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after finishing the second stage scenario effect progress process.

  FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of a second stage scenario rendering progressing process based on the first scenario rendering pattern C in the first scenario progression rendering control process.

When the first scenario the effect pattern C adds all operations time since a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4),} the added value of the operation time is more than a predetermined time Processing is equivalent to when a long press operation is performed. Here, adding all of the operation time is not limited to the case where the operation button 6 is operated continuously, but the operation related to all the operations after the continuous hitting operation even when the operation is performed intermittently. It means adding all of the time.

As shown in FIG. 48, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario effect pattern C is timing T3 ₁ has elapsed, Long press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving to start the lifetime _(T3 1 _{~T4) (YES} in step S2500).

When starting the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) (YES in step S2500), the second stage the performance control unit 76 determines whether ON-edge has been detected (step S2501), before the second On the condition that the stage scenario initial stage effect is not executed (NO in step S2502), the second stage scenario initial stage effect is executed (step S2503).

On the other hand, when executing the second stage scenario the initial effect (step S2503), a long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (Step S2504). Similarly, even when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2501) or the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2502), the long press operation valid period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (step S2504).

If long-press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2504), the second stage the performance control unit 76, on which is stored in the RAM 33c - count of off-edge between ON signal counter Is a predetermined number (step S2505). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, based on the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the ON signal number counter in the on / off edge of the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, and thus, when the player operates the operation button 6, It can be determined whether the operation is a long press operation.

On - If the count number of the off-edge between ON signal counter is determined not to be the predetermined number (NO in step S2505), the second stage the performance control unit 76, from the start of the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} It is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S2506).

If predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 _{~T4) (YES} in step S2506), the second stage the performance control unit 76, a long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the process, it is determined whether the increase number of the count number of the accumulated on signal number counter stored in the RAM 33c is a predetermined number (step S2507). The increase number of the count number of the cumulative on signal number counter can be calculated in the same manner as in the case of the first scenario effect pattern B.

If the number of increase in the number of counts accumulated on signal number counter is not predetermined time elapses from the start when not the predetermined number (NO in step S2507), or long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 _{~T4) (step} S2506 In the second stage effect control unit 76, it is determined that the number of increase in the count number of the on signal number counter or the cumulative on signal number counter between on and off edges is a predetermined number (YES in step S2505 or 2507) ), until it is determined that the operation accepting lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) has elapsed (in step S2504 YES), it repeats the steps S2501~S2507 previously described.

The second stage performance control unit 76, on the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 _~T4) - When the count number of the off-edge between ON signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2505), or long press operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} when the number of increase count of the cumulative oN signal counter after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start is a predetermined number (in step S2507 YES), long press operation flag is set If not (NO in step S2208 in FIG. 45), the second stage is determined as the progress stage (step S2209), and the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208 in FIG. 45) The advance width is determined (step S2212).

Thus, even when the accumulated value of the operating time with respect to the operation button 6 after a predetermined time in the operation accepting lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is longer than a predetermined time, continuous operating time with respect to the operation button 6 is given by processing the long-pressing equivalent operation is time, battered press operation to the operation button 6 to the operation accepting lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is made, or delayed the start of the operation on the operation button 6 Even in this case, the same effect as in the case where the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 by the continuous operation for a predetermined time or more is performed. As a result, even if the knowledge of the game method performs an operation other than the long press operation through the operation acceptance lifetime pressing length such poor player (T3 1 _{to T4),} the gaming machine 1 can enjoy fully Can be provided.

The second stage performance control unit 76, when it operation of the operation buttons 6 through the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) is made, not the operation is pressed for a long (NO in step S2508), FIG. As shown in 45, when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2211), the second step effect control unit 76 determines the minimum advance width as the progress step (step S2212), and executes the second step scenario effect execution. A process is performed (step S2210).

On the other hand, the second stage the performance control unit 76, when the operation of the operation button 6 has not been made through the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) as shown in FIG. 48 (YES in step S2508), in FIG. 45 As shown, without performing the determination of the progress stage and the second stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage progressed in the first stage), the second stage scenario presentation progress process is ended.

  Furthermore, the second stage effect control unit 76 terminates the first scenario progress effect control process by continuing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after finishing the second stage scenario effect progress process.

  FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 are flowcharts showing an example of a second stage scenario presentation progressing process based on the first scenario presentation pattern D in the first scenario progression presentation control process.

The first scenario effect pattern D adds all the specific time or more hours of operation not applicable to continuous operation time long press operation of the operation buttons 6 on the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4),} the operation When the added value of time is equal to or longer than the second predetermined time, processing is performed in the same manner as when the long press operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 49, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern D is made in the timing T3 ₁ to elapse, and long-press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving to start the lifetime _(T3 1 _{~T4) (YES} in step S2600).

When starting the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) (YES in step S2600), the second stage the performance control unit 76 determines whether ON-edge has been detected (step S2601), before the second Under the condition that the stage scenario initial effect is not executed (NO in step S2602), the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2603).

On the other hand, when executing the second stage scenario the initial effect (step S2603), a long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (Step S2604). Similarly, even when the on edge is not detected (NO in step S2601) or the on edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect is already executed (YES in step S2602), the long press operation valid period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (step S2604).

If long-press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2604), the second stage the performance control unit 76, on which is stored in the RAM 33c - count of off-edge between ON signal counter Is a first predetermined number (step S2605). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, based on the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges of the RAM 33c has reached the first predetermined number, whereby the player operates the operation button 6 In this case, it can be determined whether the operation is a long press operation.

  If it is determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is not the first predetermined number (NO in step S2605), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines the number of on signals between on and off edges as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the count number of the counter is a second predetermined number (step S2606). The “second predetermined number” in step S2606 is set as a numerical value smaller than the “first predetermined number” in step S2605.

  If the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter is the second predetermined number (YES in step S2606), the second stage effect control unit 76 adds the second predetermined number to the long press time counter (step S2607) ), It is determined whether the count number of the long press time counter is equal to or more than a specific number (step S2608). The “specified number” in step S2608 is set as a numerical value smaller than the “first predetermined number” in step S2605 and larger than the “second predetermined number” in step S2606.

When the count number of long press time counter is less than the specified number (NO in step S2608), the second stage the performance control unit 76, a long press operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} determines whether the elapsed (Step S2609). If long-press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2609), the second stage the performance control unit 76, on - when the OFF edge between signal number counter is updated (step S2610 YES), it is determined whether the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is “0” (YES in step S 2611). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter has been cleared by detecting the off edge.

  When the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is not "0" (NO in step S2611), that is, the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is updated but the count number is not cleared (“NO” in step S2611), “1” is added to the count number of the long press time counter (step S2612). That is, after the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter reaches the second predetermined number, the long press operation is performed until the on / off edge signal number counter is cleared (off edge is detected). On the condition that the acceptance valid period has not elapsed (NO in step S2609), the long press time counter is incremented by one each time the operation signal is sampled.

  If the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is not the second predetermined number (NO in step S2606), or if the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is cleared (second step effect control unit 76) It is determined that the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is the first predetermined number (YES in step S2605), and the long press time counter is greater than or equal to the specific number. Until it is determined that there is (YES in step S2608) or it is determined that the long press operation reception valid period has elapsed (YES in step S2609 or 2613), step S2601 described above with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. Repeat S2611.

And the second stage the performance control unit 76, on the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) - When the count number of the off-edge between ON signal number counter is first predetermined number (YES in step S2605), or When the count number of the long press time counter is equal to or more than the specific number (YES in step S2608), as shown in FIG. 45, when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2208) Is determined (step S2209), and when the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208), the minimum travel width is determined as the progress stage (step S2212).

As described above, the long press operation is performed by adding all the operation times longer than the specific time, and processing the same as when the long press operation is performed when the addition value of the operation times is the second predetermined time or longer. reception lifetime (T3 1 _{to T4)} to the battered press operation to the operation button 6 is performed, or even if the start of the operation of the operation button 6 is delayed, continuation of predetermined time or more with respect to the operation button 6 The same effect as in the case of performing the long press operation by the operation is performed. As a result, even if the knowledge of the game method performs an operation other than the long press operation through the operation acceptance lifetime pressing length such poor player (T3 1 _{to T4),} the gaming machine 1 can enjoy fully Can be provided.

The second stage performance control unit 76, the operation on the operation button 6 is made through the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} as shown in FIG. 49 or FIG. 59, not the operation is pressed for a long In the case (YES in step S2609 or NO in step S2613), the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the minimum progress as the progress stage when the long press operation flag is not set as shown in FIG. 45 (NO in step S2211). A width is determined (step S2212), and second stage scenario presentation execution processing is performed (step S2210).

On the other hand, the second stage the performance control unit 76, when the operation of the operation button 6 has not been made through the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) as shown in FIG. 49 (YES in step S2613), in FIG. 45 As shown, without performing the determination of the progress stage and the second stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage progressed in the first stage), the second stage scenario presentation progress process is ended.

  Furthermore, the second stage effect control unit 76 terminates the first scenario progress effect control process by continuing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after finishing the second stage scenario effect progress process.

  FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 are flowcharts showing an example of a second stage scenario rendering progressing process based on the first scenario rendering pattern E in the first scenario progression rendering control process.

The first scenario effect pattern E, as well as adding all of the specific time or more hours of operation not applicable to continuous operation time long press operation of the operation buttons 6 on the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4),} the The operation time less than the specified time is multiplied by a predetermined time and then added as the operation time, and when the added value of the operation time is equal to or longer than the second predetermined time, processing is performed in the same manner as when the long press operation is performed. .

As shown in FIG. 51, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern D is made in the timing T3 ₁ to elapse, and long-press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving to start the lifetime _(T3 1 _{~T4) (YES} in step S2700).

When starting the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) (YES in step S2700), the second stage the performance control unit 76 determines whether ON-edge has been detected (step S2701), before the second Under the condition that the stage scenario initial effect is not executed (NO in step S2702), the second stage scenario initial effect is executed (step S2703).

On the other hand, when executing the second stage scenario the initial effect (step S2703), a long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (Step S2704). Similarly, even when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2701) or the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2702), the long press operation valid period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (step S2704).

If long-press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2704), the second stage the performance control unit 76, on which is stored in the RAM 33c - count of off-edge between ON signal counter Is a first predetermined number (step S2705). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, based on the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges of the RAM 33c has reached the first predetermined number, whereby the player operates the operation button 6 In this case, it can be determined whether the operation is a long press operation.

  If it is determined that the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges is not the first predetermined number (NO in step S2705), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines the number of on signals between on and off edges as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the count number of the counter is a second predetermined number (step S2706). The “second predetermined number” in step S2706 is set as a numerical value smaller than the “first predetermined number” in step S2705 of FIG.

  If the count number of the on-off edge on signal number counter is the second predetermined number (YES in step S2706), the second stage effect control unit 76 adds the second predetermined number to the long press time counter (step S2707). ), It is determined whether the count number of the long press time counter is equal to or greater than a specific number (step S2708). The “specific number” in step S2708 is set as a numerical value smaller than the “first predetermined number” in step S2705 of FIG. 51 and larger than the “second predetermined number” in step S2706.

When the count number of long press time counter is less than the specified number (NO in step S2708), the second stage the performance control unit 76, a long press operation accepting validity period (T3 1 _{to T4)} determines whether the elapsed (Step S2709). If long-press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2709), the second stage the performance control unit 76, on - when the OFF edge between signal number counter is updated (step S2710 YES), it is determined whether the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is “0” (step S2711). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter has been cleared by detecting the off edge.

  When the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is not "0" (NO in step S2711), that is, the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is updated but the count number is not cleared Then, "1" is added to the count number of the long press time counter (step S2712). That is, after the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter reaches the second predetermined number, the long press operation is performed until the on / off edge signal number counter is cleared (off edge is detected). On the condition that the acceptance valid period has not elapsed (NO in step S2709), the long press time counter is incremented by one each time the operation signal is sampled.

  Further, when the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is not the second predetermined number (NO in step S2706), the second stage effect control unit 76 has the count number on the on / off edge signal number counter “0”. It is determined whether or not it is (step S2713). If the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is “0” (YES in step S2713), long-press a numerical value obtained by multiplying the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter updated previously by a predetermined number (× α) Add to the count number of the signal number counter. That is, when the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is not the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number and the continuous operation time is short, the continuous operation time is multiplied by a predetermined time and then added as the long press time.

  When the second-step effect control unit 76 ends the addition of the value obtained by multiplying the previous ON signal number to the long press time counter by a predetermined number in step S2714, the count number of the ON-OFF edge signal number counter is equal to that in step S2713. When it is determined that it is not “0” (it is not a continuation operation that is sufficient to be added to the long press time counter, but it is determined that the operation on the operation button 6 is continued) (NO in step S2713) or step S2711 If it is determined that the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is “0” (it becomes an addition target to the long press time counter, but it is determined that the continuous operation has ended) (YES in step S2711) , And returns to step S2701 of FIG.

  Hereinafter, it is determined that the count number of the on / off edge signal number counter is the first predetermined number (YES in step S2705), and the count number of the long press time counter is equal to or greater than the specific number (YES in step S2708) Alternatively, steps S2701 to S2714 described above with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52 are repeated until it is determined that the long press operation acceptance valid period has elapsed (YES in step S2704 or 2709).

And the second stage the performance control unit 76, on the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) - When the count number of the off-edge between ON signal number counter is first predetermined number (YES in step S2705), or When the count number of the long press time counter is equal to or more than the specific number (YES in step S2708), the second stage is set as the progress stage when the long press operation flag is not set as shown in FIG. 45 (NO in step S2208). Is determined (step S2209), and when the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208), the minimum travel width is determined as the progress stage (step S2212).

In this manner, all the operation times longer than the specific time are added and the operation time less than the specific time is multiplied by a predetermined number and added, and when the addition value of the operation time is the second predetermined time or longer operation Let be treated as though they were made, battered pressed on the operation button 6 to the operation accepting lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is made, or delayed the start of the operation on the operation button 6 Even in this case, the same effect as in the case where the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 by the continuous operation for a predetermined time or more is performed. As a result, even if the knowledge of the game method performs an operation other than the long press operation through the operation acceptance lifetime pressing length such poor player (T3 1 _{to T4),} the gaming machine 1 can enjoy fully Can be provided.

The second stage performance control unit 76, if it operation of the operation button 6 is made through the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} as shown in FIG. 51, not the operation is pressed for a long (step When the long press operation flag is not set as shown in FIG. 45 (NO in step S2211) (NO in step S2715), the second stage effect control unit 76 determines the minimum advance width as the progress stage (step S2212). , Second stage scenario rendering execution processing (step S2210).

On the other hand, the second stage the performance control unit 76, when the operation of the operation button 6 has not been made through the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) as shown in FIG. 51 (YES in step S2715), in FIG. 45 As shown, without performing the determination of the progress stage and the second stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage progressed in the first stage), the second stage scenario presentation progress process is ended.

  Furthermore, the second stage effect control unit 76 terminates the first scenario progress effect control process by continuing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after finishing the second stage scenario effect progress process.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of a second stage scenario rendering progressing process based on the first scenario rendering pattern F in the first scenario progression rendering control process.

The first scenario effect pattern F is equivalent to the case where the elapsed time since the barrage pressing operation is performed after the start of the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is long pressed when at least a predetermined time has been made To process.

As shown in FIG. 53, a predetermined time from the start of the second stage scenario effect development processing of the first scenario performance pattern F is the timing T3 ₁ has elapsed, Long press accepts the long press operation by the player operation receiving to start the lifetime _(T3 1 _{~T4) (YES} in step S2800).

When starting the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) (YES in step S2800), the second stage the performance control unit 76 determines whether ON-edge has been detected (step S2801), before the second On the condition that the stage scenario initial presentation is not executed (NO in step S2802), the second stage scenario initial presentation is executed (step S2803).

And if you run a second stage scenario the initial effect (step S2803), a long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (Step S2804). Similarly, even when the on-edge is not detected (NO in step S2801) or the on-edge is detected but the second stage scenario initial effect has already been executed (YES in step S2802), the long press operation reception valid period _(T3 1 to T4) it is determined whether the elapsed (step S2804).

If long-press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) has not elapsed (NO in step S2804), the second stage the performance control unit 76, on which is stored in the RAM 33c - count of off-edge between ON signal counter Is a predetermined number (step S2805). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether the continuous operation time for the operation button 6 is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, based on the count number of the on signal number counter between on and off edges. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the count number of the ON signal number counter in the on / off edge of the RAM 33c has reached a predetermined number, and thus, when the player operates the operation button 6, It can be determined whether the operation is a long press operation.

On - If the count number of the off-edge between ON signal counter is determined not to be the predetermined number (NO in step S2805), the second stage the performance control unit 76, the cumulative the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} on edge It is determined whether the count number of the number counter is a predetermined number, that is, whether or not the continuous hitting operation has been performed (step S2806). The “predetermined number” in this case may be arbitrarily selected from integers of “2” or more.

If the accumulated number of on-edge number counter in the long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) is the predetermined number (YES in step S2806), the second stage the performance control unit 76, after starting the time counter ( Step S2807) It is determined whether the count number of the clock counter is a predetermined number or not (step S2809). On the other hand, if the count number of the cumulative on-edge number counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2806), it is determined whether the count number of the clock counter is a predetermined number (step S2809).

If the count number of the clock counter is not a predetermined number (NO in step S2809), is second stage effect control unit 76 determined that the on / off edge on signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2805)? , or until a long press operation accepting validity period _(T3 1 to T4) is judged to have elapsed (YES in step S2804), it repeats the steps S2801~S2809 previously described.

And the second stage the performance control unit 76, the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) on - when the count number of the off-edge between ON signal number counter is a predetermined number (YES in step S2805), or time counter If the count number of is a predetermined number (YES in step S2809), the second stage is determined as the progress stage when the long press operation flag is not set as shown in FIG. 45 (NO in step S2208) (step S2209) When the long press operation flag is set (YES in step S2208), the minimum travel width is determined as the progress stage (step S2212).

Thus, even if the time elapsed since the barrage pressing operation has been performed in the operation accepting lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4)} is a long press operation is performed when it is more than a predetermined time, continuing to the operation button 6 operation time by processing equivalent long-pressing operation and a predetermined time, repeated pressing push operation is performed on the operation buttons 6 on the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T3 1 _{to T4),} or the operation of the operation button 6 Even when the start is delayed, the same effect as when the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 by the continuous operation for a predetermined time or more is performed. As a result, even if the knowledge of the game method performs an operation other than the long press operation through the operation acceptance lifetime pressing length such poor player (T3 1 _{to T4),} the gaming machine 1 can enjoy fully Can be provided.

The second stage performance control unit 76, when it operation of the operation buttons 6 through the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) is made, not the operation is pressed for a long (NO in step S2810), FIG. As shown in 45, when the long press operation flag is not set (NO in step S2211), the second step effect control unit 76 determines the minimum advance width as the progress step (step S2212), and executes the second step scenario effect execution. A process is performed (step S2210).

On the other hand, if the operation of the operation button 6 has not been made through the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T3 1 to T4) as shown in FIG. 53 (YES in step S2810), determination of the advanced stage as shown in FIG. 45 and the The second stage scenario presentation progressing process is ended without performing the two stage scenario presentation execution process (without proceeding from the stage proceeding in the first stage).

  Furthermore, the second stage effect control unit 76 terminates the first scenario progress effect control process by continuing the final result notification effect process shown in FIG. 46 after finishing the second stage scenario effect progress process.

<Scenario progress presentation based on second scenario presentation pattern 782>
Next, the second scenario effect pattern 782 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 83. Here, the second scenario rendering pattern 782 includes a second scenario rendering pattern A that is executed on July 14, 2014, 0:00 to July 20, 2014, 24:00, and July 21, 2014. There are two types of second scenario rendering pattern B that are executed on a day of 0:00 to July 26, 24:00 on a day. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing timings of a second scenario effect pattern 782 defined in advance for the second scenario effect patterns A and B. When the second scenario effect pattern A or B is selected by the effect pattern determination unit 70, the scenario progress effect control unit 73 selects the first stage effect control unit 75, the suggested effect control unit 74, and the second step effect control unit 76. Are performed in this order, and the first stage effect 200, the suggested effect 203, and the second stage effect 204 defined as the second scenario effect pattern 782 are respectively executed at predetermined timings.

  When scenario progress presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782 is started at timing T0, first, the first stage presentation control unit 75 executes the first stage presentation 200 within the first stage presentation period (T0 to T2). To function.

  The first stage effect control unit 75 starts the title display 201 corresponding to the second scenario effect pattern 782 at timing T0, and continues the title display 201 for the title display period (T0 to T1). The first stage effect control unit 75 determines that the timing T1 which is the start timing of the first stage scenario progress effect period (T1 to T2) after the title display period (T0 to T1) has elapsed, that is, the title display period (T0 to T2). If it is determined that T1) has ended, then the first stage scenario progress presentation 202 is started.

When the first step scenario progress effect 202 is started at timing T1, the first step effect control unit 75 causes the single-push operation guide image 82b (image simulating the effect button, indicator of effective operation time) to be displayed, who in prompting the one-base hit pressing operation of the operation button 6, the accepts one-base hit pressing operation of the operation button 6 by the player in subsequent one-base hit pressing operation acceptance lifetime (T1 0 _{to T1 4),} one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period (T1 If it is determined within _{0 to} T1 ₄ ) that the player has performed a single hit operation by the player, then after this determination, the scenario progress based on the second scenario effect pattern 782 up to different first stages according to the timing of receiving the single hit operation. The first stage scenario progress effect 202 for advancing the effect is executed. This first stage is a stage that has advanced to the final stage rather than the initial stage and is a stage that has not been reached yet. Here, the method for determining the presence or absence of the single-push operation by the first-stage effect control unit 75 in this case is the single-push-operation acceptance effective period (T1) in the first stage effect period (T0 to T2) of the first scenario effect pattern 781. _The method is the same as the method of determining the presence or absence of the single-pushing pressing operation and the long-pressing operation by the first stage effect control unit 75 in _{1 to} T1 ₂ ).

On the other hand, if it is determined that no one-base hit pressing operation by the player, the first stage performance control unit 75, after the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 0 ~T1 ₄₎ has elapsed, based on the second scenario performance pattern 782 The scenario progress presentation is advanced to a predetermined stage. When the player does not receive a single-press operation, the stage at which the scenario progress effect progresses is the minimum progress width, which is a stage smaller than the first stage. That is, in this first step scenario progress effect 202, the first step in which the scenario progress effect progresses is different depending on the timing at which the player performs the single hit operation, and the single hit operation is performed if the timing at which the single hit operation is performed is poor. There are also cases where scenario progress effects only advance at the same stage as the minimum advance width when there is no. On the contrary, if the timing for performing the single-pushing operation is good, the scenario progress presentation may progress to the first stage, which has dramatically advanced as compared with the minimum advancing width when the single-pressing operation is not performed. In other words, if the player performs the single-push operation at a predetermined timing within the single-push operation acceptance valid period, the scenario progress effect significantly progresses, so the player who expects the scenario progress effect to progress to the final stage has a timing It will come to perform single hit operation positively while looking for it. In the first stage scenario progress effect 202, an effect of causing the scenario progress effect to proceed to the first stage is performed at least once by accepting the single-push operation as described above. In the present embodiment, the case of being performed twice is illustrated. Then, after the first stage scenario progress effect 202 is started, at timing T2, the first stage scenario progress effect 202 by the first stage effect control unit 75 ends.

  At timing T2, the suggestion effect control unit 74 functions to execute the suggestion effect 203 within the suggestion effect period (T2 to T3). That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 203 from the timing T2, and ends the suggestion effect 203 at the timing T3.

When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect 203, the suggestion effect control section 74 performs an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the scenario progress presentation proceeds to the final stage based on the result of the special game determination. In the scenario progress presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782, the suggestion presentation control unit 74 causes the player to display the long press operation guidance image (image imitating presentation button, indicator of effective operation time) and the player promote the long-press operation, it accepts the operation of the operation button 6 to the operation accepting the validity period long press _(T2 0 ~T3). It suggested performance control unit 74, the operation button in a plurality of periods _{T2 0 ~T2 1, T2 1 ~T2} 2, T2 2 ~T2 3, T2 3 ~T2 4, T2 4 ~T3 within operation accepting validity hold It is determined whether the operation for 6 corresponds to a long press operation (an operation including at least one of an original long press operation and an operation not regarded as the original long press operation but regarded as a long press operation). In response, the scenario progress presentation executes a presentation that indicates the degree of expectation that the scenario progress presentation proceeds to the final stage.

Here, in the ROM 33b, each period _T2 0 _{to T2} 1 in operation accepting validity period _(T2 0 to T3) in _{hold, T2 1 ~T2 2, T2 2} ~T2 3, T2 3 ~T2 4, T2 4 A plurality of types of progressing patterns are prepared as a progressing pattern determination table (FIGS. 62 and 63) indicating to which stage the stage suggesting the result of the special game determination is to be advanced when there is a long press operation at ~ T3. It is determined in advance, based on the result of the special game determination, whether to advance the stage of suggestion according to which progression pattern. In this suggestion produce 203, if it is not carried out any operation on the operation button 6 to the player long-press operation effective acceptance period _(T2 0 ~T3) in the (non-operation), whether or not the scenario progress production to proceed to the final stage The degree of expectation of is not suggested. Thus, the player positively operates the operation button 6.

  At timing T3, the second stage effect control unit 76 functions to execute the second stage effect 204 in the second stage effect period (T3 to T6). That is, the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the second stage scenario progress effect 205 from the timing T3, and after the second stage scenario progress effect 205, when the timing T4 comes, the final result notification effect 206 is performed.

  The final result notification effect 206 is the success effect 207 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage as described above, the failure effect 208 in which the scenario progress effect does not progress to the final phase, or the revival effect 210 after the failure effect 209 It is executed as an effect to be performed. The success effect 207 continues until timing T6 and ends at timing T6. On the other hand, failure presentation 208 continues until timing T6. The failure presentation 209 continues until timing T5. When the resurrection effect 210 is performed after the failure effect 209, the resurrection effect 210 starts from timing T5 and continues until timing T6.

  As described above, the second scenario effect pattern 782 is a 90 second effect pattern to be performed within the period of timing T0 to T6, and if the success effect 207 or the resurrection effect 210 is finally performed, the transition to the special game state ST2 is made This is what is called a confirmed effect in which the player is informed.

FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining scenario progress presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782. When scenario progress presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782 is started, a scenario presentation screen as shown in FIG. 55 is displayed on the image display 12. In this scenario effect display screen, the character 82a is displayed hanging on an air swing and swinging in the left and right direction, and a scenario for aiming at the goal position progresses while connecting six air swings from the start position to the goal position. . The goal position is in the right direction of the screen. At the top of the scenario effect screen is displayed a path diagram 82d showing an air swing from the start position to the goal position, and a character icon 82e showing the current position of the character 82a is displayed on the path diagram 82d. Ru. In addition to the screen, at a one-base hit press operation accepting the validity period _(T1 0 ~T1 _4), prompting a one-base hit-press operation to the player one-base hit press operation guide image 82b (image the performance button that mimics the operation of the effective time indicator) Is displayed. Further, on the lower part of the path diagram 82d in the scenario effect screen, a power gauge 82c is displayed whose power storage amount changes as the character 82a swings in the left-right direction. In the power gauge 82c, the power storage amount is minimum (0%) when the character 82a is positioned at the rightmost position, and the power storage amount is maximum (100%) when positioned at the leftmost position. That is, when the character 82a swings in the left-right direction, the power storage amount constantly changes within the range of 0% to 100% according to the position of the character 82a. When the amount of stored power is large at the timing when the player receives a single-press operation, the character 82a jumps over a plurality of air swings and transfers to the next air swing, and scenario progress effects dramatically progress. On the other hand, when the amount of stored power is small at the timing when the player has received a single-press operation, the number of aerial swings over which the character 82a jumps is reduced, and the degree of progress of scenario progression rendering is smaller than when the amount of stored power is large. .

Figure 56 is a diagram showing the relationship between the moving speed swing timing and character 82a of one-base hit pressing operation in the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 0 ~T1 _4). As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the character 82a swings in two reciprocation half left and right directions while hanging on one air swing. First, the character 82a moves the first outward path 83a from the position where the power storage amount is 100% to the position where it is 0%, and then the position where the power storage amount is 100% from where it is 0% The first return path 83b is moved toward. The same is true for the second reciprocation, and the character 82a moves the second outward path 83c from the position where the power storage amount is 100% to the position where it is 0%, and then the power storage amount is 0% The second return path 83d is moved from the position toward the position at 100%. Finally, the character 82a moves the third outward path 83e from the position where the power storage amount is 100% to the position where it is 0%. The single-press operation acceptance effective period for accepting a single-press operation by the player is a period from the start of movement of the first outward path 83a (timing T1 ₀ ) to the end of movement of the second return path 83d (timing T1 ₄ ) . When a single hit operation by the player is received within this period, the number of movement moves when moving to the next air swing is determined by the power storage amount corresponding to the timing of receiving the single hit operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), when a single push operation is received between 0% and 30%, the amount of movement when the character 82a moves to the next air swing becomes “1”. , the same amount of movement as when one-base hit pressing operation is not performed in the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 0 ~T1 _4). When the power storage amount is received between 30% and 60%, the movement amount when the character 82a moves to the next air swing is "1" or "2". For example, it may be determined to be “1” when the power storage amount is 30% to 40%, and “2” when it is 40% to 60%. Further, when the power storage amount is received between 60% and 90%, the movement amount when the character 82a moves to the next air swing is "2" or "3" when the single-pushing operation is received. For example, it may be determined to be "2" when the power storage amount is 60% to 80%, and "3" when it is 80% to 90%. Furthermore, when the power storage amount receives a single-press operation between 90% and 100%, the amount of movement when the character 82a moves to the next air swing is the maximum amount of “3”. As described above, in the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782, the progress degree of the scenario progress effect changes in accordance with the timing at which the single press operation is received.

Also when the character 82a accepts a one-base hit pressed while moving the first forward path 83a _(T1 0 to T1 ₁ during), a character 82a is a timing T1 ₁ that has reached the end of its first forward path 83a of the next Move to the air swing. When the character 82a receives a single-push operation while moving the first return path 83b (T1 _{1 to} T1 ₂ ) or when the character 82a moves on the second outgoing path 83c (T1 _{2 to} T1 ₃ ) when receiving a pressing operation, character 82a at the timing T1 ₃ that has reached the end of the second forward path 83c moves to the next trapeze. If more character 82a accepts a one-base hit pressed while moving the second backward 83d _(T1 3 ~T1 _4), character 82a is the next trapeze at the timing T1 ₅ having reached the end point of the third forward 83e And move. As described above, in the scenario progression presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782, the timing at which the scenario progression presentation progresses to the next stage also differs according to the timing at which the single-press operation is accepted. As a result, the scenario progress presentation can be advanced to the next stage at an appropriate timing according to the timing at which the single hit pressing operation is received, so that a highly entertaining presentation is performed. Hereinafter, scenario progress presentation based on such a second scenario presentation pattern 782 will be described in more detail.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing one aspect of the title display 201 and the first stage scenario progress presentation 202, which are the first stage presentation 200 performed by the first stage presentation control unit 75. As shown in FIG. Although only the screen example displayed on the image display 12 is shown in FIG. 57, the screen displayed on the image display 12 with some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display 12 and Interlocking effects may be performed.

  The first stage effect control unit 75 causes the image display 12 to display the title display 201 at the start timing T0 of the execution of the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern 782. In the title display 201, the player is notified of how to proceed with scenario progress presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782. In the example of FIG. 57, a message of “Press the button and aim at the goal!” Is displayed, and if the character 82a can finally reach the goal point by performing the button operation, a game advantageous to the player It is informed that value is given.

The first stage effect control unit 75 starts the first stage scenario progress effect 202 when timing T1 comes after the display of the title display 201 for a predetermined time. The first stage effect control unit 75 causes the image display 12 to display the initial screen 202 a of the first stage effect 200 in the first stage scenario progress effect 202. In this initial screen 202a, the scenario effect screen shown in FIG. 55 (the character 82a hanging in the air swing and swinging in the left and right direction, the path diagram 82d from the start position to the goal position, the position of the character 82a on the path diagram 82d An image including a character icon 82e is displayed. After displaying the initial screen 202a, becomes the start timing T1 ₀ of one-base hit pressing operation accepting valid period, the first stage performance control unit 75 prompts the push one-base hit in the initial screen 202a operated one-base hit pressing operation guide image 82b (performance button (Image of imitating the operation effective time) is displayed, and the acceptance of the single push operation by the player is started. By displaying such a single push operation guidance image 82b, the player can grasp that the button operation has become effectively accepted. Incidentally, even while the button operation guidance image is displayed, the power storage amount constantly changes with the movement of the character 82a in the left and right direction.

When the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 0 ~T1 ₄₎ one-base hit pressing operation by the player in is performed, the first stage performance control unit 75, the scenario proceeds according to the timing at which the one-base hit pressing operation is performed Decide on the next stage to advance the rendition. In addition, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines the timing to shift the scenario progress effect to the next stage according to the timing when the single push operation is accepted, and the initial screen 202a is switched to the second screen 202b at the determined timing. The transition is made, and the character 82a is jumped out toward the next air swing. Thereafter, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the display screen of the image display 12 to transition from the second screen 202b to the third screen 202c, and swings in the left-right direction with the character 82a hanging on the next air swing. Display the current status. In the third screen 202c, the display position of the character icon 82e advances in accordance with the position of the air plane after the character 82a jumps.

On the other hand, if the one-base hit pressing operation by the player is not performed in the one-base hit pressing operation accepting validity period _(T1 0 ~T1 ₄₎ in a first stage the performance control unit 75, the minimum as the next step for advancing the scenario progress effect Determine the width of progress (number of moving marks = 1). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the initial screen 202a to transition to the fourth screen 202d at the latest timing after the character 82a swings in two reciprocation half left and right directions, and directs the character 82a to the next air swing. Pop out. Thereafter, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the display screen of the image display 12 to transition from the fourth screen 202d to the fifth screen 202e, and swings in the left-right direction with the character 82a hanging on the next air swing. Display the current status. Also in the fifth screen 202e, the display position of the character icon 82e advances in accordance with the position of the air plane after the character 82a jumps.

  By the way, the timing (the timing at which the character 82a jumps to the next air swing) at which the scenario progress effect is advanced differs between when the player performs a single-press operation and when the single-push operation is not performed. There is. Therefore, the first stage effect control unit 75 causes the scenario progress effect to proceed to the next step earlier than the timing of advancing the scenario progress effect when the single-push operation is not accepted when the single-push operation is accepted. When the first stage effect control unit 75 performs the effect of causing the character 82a to shift to the next stage twice in accordance with the timing at which the player has accepted the single-push press operation as described above. Therefore, after the character 82a has progressed to the next stage, when it is time to be able to receive a single hit operation by the player again, the first stage effect control unit 75 returns to the state of displaying the above-mentioned initial screen 202a. A process of accepting the single hit operation by the player and advancing the character 82a to the next stage is performed according to the timing at which the single hit operation is received. Even if the player performs the single-press operation twice, the character 82a does not reach the goal in the first stage scenario progress effect 202.

  FIG. 58, FIG. 59, and FIG. 60 are diagrams showing an aspect of the suggestion effect 203 performed by the suggestion effect control unit 74. As shown in FIG. Although FIGS. 58, 59, and 60 show only an example of the screen displayed on the image display 12, the image display may be displayed on some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display 12. An effect linked to the screen displayed on 12 may be performed.

The suggestion effect control unit 74 functions in a state where the display screen 202 f in a state where scenario progress effect has progressed to the first stage is displayed by the first stage scenario progress presentation 202 by the first stage effect control unit 75 described above. The suggested rendering control unit 74 starts the suggested rendering 203 when timing T2 comes after the first stage scenario progress rendering 202 described above is finished. In the suggested effect 203, the suggested effect control unit 74 causes the image display 12 to display an effect screen related to the suggested effect 203. At the center of the screen of the effect screen according to the suggestion effect 203, a power gauge 84a in which no power is stored is displayed. The word MIN is written on the right end of the power gauge 84a. The word "MAX" is written on the left end of the power gauge 84a. Between the MIN and MAX in the power gauge 84a, four partitions 84b divide the same at equal intervals (a distance of 1/5 between MIN and MAX). Becomes the start timing T2 ₀ of the long press operation accepted the validity period _(T2 0 ~T3), suggesting the effect control unit 74, button operation guide to encourage the long press operation of the operation button 6 to the player to the effect screen according to the suggested performance 203 An image (an image simulating the effect button, an indicator of the operation effective time, and a long press! Character) is displayed, and reception of the long press operation by the player is started.

The suggestion effect control unit 74 receives the long press operation by the player within the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3). Then, the suggested effect control unit 74 is configured to select one of the plurality of timings set in the long press operation acceptance valid period, which is one of the predetermined periods determined based on the effect, and the one other timing. If the operation information indicates that the player has operated the operation button 6 at one timing, the operation information is processed in association with the operation time at each timing. Then, for example, the suggestion effect control unit 74 operates the operation button at each of the plurality of timings T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ and T3 set within the long press operation reception valid period (T2 _{0 to} T3). On the condition that the long press operation is performed for 6, the long press effect in which the execution mode of the specific game effect by the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a and the display color of the power storage amount changes in stages. More specifically, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets one of a plurality of timings set in a predetermined period determined based on the effect to a predetermined timing immediately before the one timing. The operation information indicates that the operation button 6 is operated by the player in a specific period between the specific period of time, another one timing, and the predetermined start timing immediately before the one timing. At one time, the operation information is processed in association with the operation time in each specific period. Then, for example, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the timings T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ , and T3 and the respective predetermined start timings T2 ₀ , T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , and T2 ₄ immediately before each other. The presence or absence of the long press operation is determined in each of the specific periods (T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , T2 _{4 to} T3) during the interval. Then, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets a long press operation in each specific period (T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , T2 _{4 to} T3) as a condition. MIN → first gauge → second gauge → third gauge → fourth gauge → MAX The power storage amount of the power gauge 84 a is increased. In addition, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets a long press operation in each specific period (T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , T2 _{4 to} T3) as a condition. Display color of power storage amount at the arrival time of the first gauge, display color of power storage amount at the arrival time of the second gauge, display color of power storage amount at the arrival of the third gauge, power of the arrival point of the fourth gauge The display color of the storage amount and the display color of the power storage amount at the time of reaching MAX are changed from blue to green to yellow to red to iridescent. Thus, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs the long press operation time in each specific period (T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , T2 _{1 to} T2 ₂ , T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , T2 _{4 to} T3). The execution mode of the specific game effect is changed on the basis of at least a part of the long press operation time. In addition, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines, at one determination timing among the plurality of determination timings T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , and T2 ₄ , between a predetermined start timing immediately before the one determination timing. When it is determined that the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 during the period, the same gauge advancing processing as in the case where the long press operation is performed may be performed at the determination timing before the one determination timing. In addition, when a predetermined long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 at one timing, the same as in the case where the long press effect is executed at another timing before the one timing It is possible to change the mode of implementation.

To be more specific, the FIG. 58, as in the gauge advanced cases of in FIG. 59, and FIG. 60 (a) → (b0) , suggesting the performance control unit 74, the operation in a specific period of time _T2 0 to T2 ₁ If the button 6 is never operated, the power storage amount of the time of the start timing T2 ₀ (MIN) without increasing the, only the updated display of the remaining time of the long press operation accepting lifetime. Further, FIG. 58, as the gauge advanced cases of in FIG. 59, and FIG. 60 (a) → (b1) , suggesting the performance control unit 74, when the timing T2 ₀ since there is an operation of the operation button 6, press and hold Power storage at a speed (hereinafter referred to as non-long press progressing speed) advancing by one gauge between consecutive timings T within the operation reception valid period (a length of 1⁄5 of the length of the long press operation reception period itself) Start increasing the amount. Then, the power storage is performed without determining that the long press operation (an operation including at least one of an original long press operation and an operation not regarded as a long press operation originally regarded as a long press operation) is performed on the operation button 6 If the quantity reaches the immediately preceding stage 84e of the first gauge (specifically, the 80% stage between the MIN and the first gauge), the increase in the amount of power storage beyond the immediately preceding stage 84e is limited. Further, FIGS. 58, 59, and as a gauge progress example of in FIG. 60 (a) → (b2) , suggesting the performance control unit 74, a long press operation line for the operation buttons 6 on the timing T2 ₀ after If it is determined that the Broken, the power storage amount is calculated the speed to reach the first gauge and long press traveling speed, the non-long-pressing the moving speed and the traveling speed hold power storage amount during the period from that point until the timing T2 ₁ change the rate of increase of, at the timing T2 ₁ to reach a power storage amount in the first gauge. When the amount of stored power reaches the first gauge, the suggestion effect control unit 74 turns the display color of the amount of stored power blue.

The suggested effect control unit 74 performs timing T2 as in the example of (g0) → (c00) in FIG. 58, (b1) → (c10) in FIG. 59, and (b2) → (c20) in FIG. ₁ to T2 when the operation button 6 in a specific period of ₂ are not at all operation, without increasing the power storage amount of the time of the start timing T2 _1, performs only updating the display of the remaining time of a long press operation acceptance lifetime. In addition, as in the example of (g0) → (c01) in FIG. 58, (b1) → (c11) in FIG. 59, and (b2) → (c21) in FIG. When the timing T2 ₁ since there is an operation of the operation button 6 to start the increase of power storage amount of the non-long press running speed. Then, the power storage is performed without determining that the long press operation (an operation including at least one of an original long press operation and an operation not regarded as a long press operation originally regarded as a long press operation) is performed on the operation button 6 If the amount reaches the immediately preceding stage 84e of the second gauge (specifically, the 80% stage between the first gauge and the second gauge), the increase in the amount of power storage beyond the immediately preceding stage 84e is limited Do. Also, as in the example of (b0) → (c02) in FIG. 58, (b1) → (c12) in FIG. 59, and (b2) → (c22) in FIG. If it is determined that the long press operation to the timing T2 ₁ since the operation button 6 is performed, and the power storage amount is calculated the speed to reach the second gauge length press running speed during the period from that point until the timing T2 ₂ , non-long press to change the speed of increase of the power storage amount and the traveling speed hold from the traveling speed, according to the timing T2 ₂ to reach the power storage amount in the second gauge. When the power storage amount reaches the second gauge, the suggestion effect control unit 74 changes the display color of the power storage amount to green.

Here, suggesting effect control unit 74, in FIG. 58 (b0) → (c02) , and (b1) in FIG. 59 → manner, specified period of gauge advanced cases of (c12) (timing _T2 1 _~T2 2) If it does not reach the first gauge is a pre-stage of step to reach a long press conditions the operation of a specific time period the power accumulated amount of time the long press operation is performed (timing T2 1 _{to T2 2)} in the timing T2 _{Between two,} go straight through the first gauge to the second gauge. Therefore, without being determined long press operation is performed at a specific time (timing T2 0 _{to T2 1),} if the long press operation in the next specified time period (timing _T2 1 ~T2 ₂₎ is determined to have been performed Proximity to power storage amount reaches the first gauge from the MIN, long press operation is performed in each particular period (timing _T2 0 to T2 ₁₎ and the following specific period (timing _T2 1 to T2 ₂₎ in If it is determined that the power storage amount is determined to be lower than the time required to reach the first gauge from MIN. That is, in this embodiment, for the change of presentation mode by the power storage amount of the power gauge 84a, if the long press operation at timing T2 ₂ is determined to have been performed, the timing T2 ₂ other previous timing T2 ₁ When there is an unreached effect mode that has not been executed in, the effect mode is changed to the unreached effect mode in a second time that is shorter than the first time in the absence of the unreached effect mode.

Further, suggesting the performance control unit 74 in the FIG. 58 (b0) → (c02) , and as in the gauge advanced cases of (b1) → (c12) in Fig. 59, a specified time period (timing _T2 1 _{~T2 2)} If the power storage amount at the time when the long press operation is performed does not reach the first gauge, which is a stage before reaching the condition that the long press operation is performed for the specific period, the power storage amount passes the first gauge The change of the power storage amount to blue is skipped in time, and the power storage amount is changed to green when the power storage amount reaches the second gauge. That is, in this embodiment, for the change of presentation mode by the power storage amount of the display color of the power gauge 84a, if the long press operation at timing T2 ₂ is determined to have been performed, the timing T2 ₂ previous other when there is not reached the representation embodiment is not running at the timing T2 _1, it carries out an effect that does not change the phase of the unreached.

For similarly timing T2 ₂ later, suggesting the performance control unit 74, a specific time period (timing _T2 2 to T2 _3, a timing _T2 3 to T2 _4, a timing _T2 4 to T3) in response to long press the presence or absence of the operation of each, The power storage amount of the power gauge 84a is increased and the display color of the power storage amount is changed. The suggestion effect control unit 74 suggests the degree of expectation that the scenario progress presentation will progress to the final stage, based on the power storage amount at the end of the single-press operation acceptance valid period and the display color of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a.

  FIG. 61 (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 84a and the degree of expectation. FIG. 61 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the display color of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a and the degree of expectation. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), when the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 84a reaches the first gauge, the expectation for the scenario progress stage to proceed to the final stage is “low”. In the case where the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 84a exceeds the first gauge and reaches the second gauge, the expectation of progressing the scenario progress to the final stage is also “low”. When the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a exceeds the second gauge and reaches the third gauge, the expectation for the scenario progress stage to proceed to the final stage is “medium” higher than “low”. When the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a exceeds the third gauge and reaches the fourth gauge, the expectation for the scenario progress stage to proceed to the final stage is “high” higher than “medium”. Then, when the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a exceeds the fourth gauge and reaches MAX, it is determined that the scenario progress presentation proceeds to the final stage.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the display color of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a is blue, the expectation for the scenario progress effect to progress to the final stage is "low". When the display color of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a is green, the expectation for the scenario progress presentation to progress to the final stage is also "low". When the display color of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a is yellow, the expectation for the scenario progress presentation to progress to the final stage is "medium". When the display color of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a is yellow, the expectation for the scenario progress presentation to progress to the final stage is “high”. Then, when the display color of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a is iridescent, it is determined that the scenario progress presentation proceeds to the final stage. As described above, in the suggestion effect 203, the degree of expectation is suggested by the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a by the player and the display color of the power storage amount. When the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a is changed, the suggested effect control unit 74 displays the background of the power gauge 84a, the movable part 14, the frame lamp 9 and the like, and the display color of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a. It may be made to change according to. As a result, the suggestion effect 203 can be performed on the entire screen of the image display 12 or the entire game machine 1.

The suggested effect control unit 74 refers to the progress pattern determination table in the ROM 33b at the start timing T2 of the suggested effect 203, and based on the result of the special game determination, according to any progress pattern in the progress pattern determination table. It is determined in advance whether to change the internal power storage amount. The suggested effect control unit 74, the timing _T2 0 to T2 ₁ of propriety gauge progress leading to the first gauge in a specific period in the operation accepting validity period long press, the second gauge at a specific period of time _T2 1 to T2 ₂ whether gauge progress leading to the timing _T2 2 to T2 ₃ of the third possibility gauge progress leading to the gauge in a particular period, the timing _T2 3 to T2 ₄ fourth possibility gauge progress leading to the gauge in a particular period, and the timing T2 _The display screen is updated while the progress of the gauge progressing to MAX in the specific period of _{4 to} T3 is determined according to this progressing pattern, and the power storage amount at timing T3 at the end time of the long press operation acceptance valid period and its The display color of power storage indicates the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a progress pattern determination table to be referred to when the result of the special game determination is “with transition to the special game state”. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a progress pattern determination table to be referred to when the result of the special game determination is “no transition to the special game state”.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the progress pattern determination table when the result of the special game determination is “with transition to the special game state”, the power storage amount at timing T3 at the end of the long press operation acceptance valid period To reach MAX, to stop the power storage amount at timing T3 which is the end time point of the long press operation reception valid period up to the fourth gauge, and power of the timing T3 which is the end time point of the long press operation reception valid period The one that stops the accumulation amount up to the third gauge and the one that stops the power storage amount at timing T3 that is the end time of the long press operation acceptance valid period up to the second gauge, the end time of the long press operation acceptance valid period It includes one that stops the power storage amount at timing T3 up to the first gauge. In FIG. 62, for the sake of simplicity, the number of progressing patterns for causing the power storage amount at timing T3 at the end of the long press operation reception effective period to reach MAX is only 10 (traveling patterns 101 to 110). Preferably, a larger number of progression patterns are recorded in the progression pattern determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the progress pattern determination table when the result of the special game determination is “no transition to the special game state”, the power storage amount at timing T3 at the end of the long press operation acceptance valid period Is stopped at the fourth gauge, and the power storage amount at timing T3 which is the end time of the long press operation reception valid period is stopped at the third gauge, timing T3 which is the end time of the long press operation reception valid period The power storage amount is stopped up to the second gauge, and the power storage amount at time T3 at which the long press operation acceptance effective period ends is stopped up to the first gauge. In the progress pattern determination table when the result of the special game determination is “no transition to the special game state”, the one that causes the power storage amount at timing T3 at the end of the long press operation acceptance valid period to reach MAX Not included.

For example, if the advance pattern 101 of the determination table in FIG. 62 is selected in the start timing T2 of the suggested effect 203, suggesting the performance control unit 74, the timing _{T2 0 ~T2 1, T2 1 ~T2} 2, T2 2 ~T2 3 , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , and T2 _{4 to} T3 in each specific period as follows. First, the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the first gauge when it is determined that the long press operation is performed in the specific period of the timing T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ . Suggested performance control unit 74 determines that the long press operation on the specified period of time T2 ₁ to T2 ₂ is made to reach the power storage amount in the second gauge. The suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power storage amount to reach the third gauge when it is determined that the long press operation is performed in the specific period of the timing T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ . Suggested performance control unit 74 determines that the long press operation is performed in a specific period of time T2 ₃ to T2 ₄ to reach the power storage amount in the fourth gauge. Suggested performance control unit 74 determines that the long press operation on the specified period of time T2 4 _{to T3} is made to reach the power storage amount MAX. When this advancing pattern 101 is selected, the power storage amount reaches MAX at timing T3 which is the end time of the long press operation acceptance effective period, and the player is informed that the scenario advancing effect will be the final stage.

Further, if the advance pattern 105 of the determination table in FIG. 62 is selected in the start timing T2 of the suggested effect 203, suggesting the performance control unit 74, the timing _{T2 0 ~T2 1, T2 1 ~T2} 2, T2 2 ~T2 3 , T2 _{3 to} T2 ₄ , and T2 _{4 to} T3 in each specific period as follows. First, the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the first gauge when it is determined that the long press operation is performed in the specific period of the timing T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ . Suggested performance control unit 74 determines that the long press operation on the specified period of time T2 ₁ to T2 ₂ is made to reach the power storage amount in the second gauge. The suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power storage amount to reach the third gauge when it is determined that the long press operation is performed in the specific period of the timing T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ . It suggested performance control unit 74, in particular the period of time T2 ₃ to T2 _4, with or without the long press operation, restricting the gauge progression to ahead stage of the point of timing T2 _3. Suggested performance control unit 74 determines that the long press operation on the specified period of time T2 4 _{to T3} is made to release the limit of the gauge the progress of the point between time points T2 _3, the power storage amount, passes through the fourth gauge To reach at once. Even when the progress pattern 105 is selected, the power storage amount reaches MAX at timing T3 which is the end time point of the long press operation acceptance effective period, and the scenario progress effect is final as in the case where the progress pattern 101 is selected. It is informed to the player that the stage will be reached.

Further, if the advance pattern 301 of the determination table of the determination table or Figure 63 of FIG. 62 is selected in the start timing T2 of the suggested effect 203, a timing _{T2 0 ~T2 1, T2 1 ~T2} 2, T2 2 ~T2 3, gauge progress in T2 ₃ ~T2 _4, each specific period _T2 4 to T3 set as follows. First, the suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power accumulation amount to reach the first gauge when it is determined that the long press operation is performed in the specific period of the timing T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ . Suggested performance control unit 74 determines that the long press operation on the specified period of time T2 ₁ to T2 ₂ is made to reach the power storage amount in the second gauge. The suggestion effect control unit 74 causes the power storage amount to reach the third gauge when it is determined that the long press operation is performed in the period of timing T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ . It suggested performance control unit 74, the period of time T2 ₃ to T2 _4, with or without the long press operation, restricting the gauge progression to ahead stage of the point of timing T2 _3. It suggested performance control unit 74, in the period from the timing T2 4 _{to T3,} with or without long press operation, restricting the gauge progression to ahead stage of the point of timing T2 _3. When the progress pattern 105 is selected, the power storage amount does not reach MAX at timing T3 which is the end time of the long press operation acceptance effective period, and the player is not notified that the scenario progress presentation will be the final stage.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an aspect of the second stage effect 204 performed by the second stage effect control unit 76. As shown in FIG. In addition, although only the screen example displayed on the image display 12 is shown in FIG. 64, the screen displayed on the image display 12 with some or all of the components of the rendering device 36 other than the image display 12 and Interlocking effects may be performed.

  Here, the second stage effect 204 includes a second stage scenario progress effect 205 and a final result notification effect 206 indicating the final result of the scenario progress effect performed after the effect indicating the final result (see FIG. 54). The final result notification effect 206 includes three modes of a success effect 207 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage, a failure effect 208 which does not progress in the final phase, and a reactivation effect 210 after the failure effect 209 .

  In the second stage effect 204, when the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the second stage scenario progress effect 205 after the above-described suggestion effect 203, as shown in FIG. The initial screen 204 a of the scenario progress presentation 205 is displayed. In this initial screen 204 a, a preparation image for progressing from the first stage to the final stage advanced in the first stage scenario progress presentation 202 is displayed. Then, the second stage effect control unit 76 causes the transition from the initial screen 204a to the first screen 204b. On the first screen 204b, the character 82a jumps out toward the goal point, and a different character appears from the goal point, and a screen for trying to catch the character 82a in the air is displayed.

  After that, at timing T5, the second stage effect control unit 76 starts one of the success effect 207 and the failure effect 208 as the final result notification effect 206. The second stage effect control unit 76 causes the display screen of the image display 12 to transition from the first screen 204b of the second stage scenario progress effect 205 to the initial screen 205a of the success effect 207 when the success effect 207 is performed. 82a displays an image that is finely captured in the air, and then displays a first screen 205b indicating that the goal point has been reached. The success effect 207 is executed over the time from the timing T4 to the timing T6. If the success effect 207 is executed, then the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special gaming state ST2.

  For this failure presentation, there are a failure presentation 208 which is executed over time from timing T4 to a timing T6, and a failure presentation 209 which is executed until a certain timing T5 before the timing T4 to the timing T6 and switches to the revival presentation 210. is there. As shown in FIG. 64, when the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the failure aspect effect 208 of the former aspect, the display screen of the image display 12 is displayed from the first screen 204 b of the second stage effect 204 to failure effect 207. The transition is made to the initial screen 206a, and the image where the character 82a falls without being caught in the air is displayed, and then the first screen 206b is displayed to indicate that the goal point has failed to be reached. In this case, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the same as before, except in the case where the resurrection production 210 is performed after the failure production 209.

  On the other hand, when the second stage effect control unit 76 performs the latter type of failure effect 209, the second stage effect control unit 76 executes the same failure effect 209 as the former embodiment until timing T5, and between timing T5 and timing T6. Perform a resurrection production 210 on. In the resurrection effect 210, the image display 12 shows a screen indicating that the failure has turned to success (for example, a screen on which the character of "Rescue! Success" shown on the bottom screen 110b of FIG. 28 (b) is displayed). Display on. When this rebirth effect 210 is performed, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 shifts to the special game state ST2 as in the case where the scenario progress effect has reached the final stage.

  Next, the processing procedure in the effect control board 33 when scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A or B is performed will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of a second scenario progression presentation pattern control process in the case where the scenario progression presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782 is performed in the presentation control board 33. This process is started, and at timing T1 when the first stage scenario effect 202 is started (YES in step S3100), the effect control board 33 causes the first stage effect control unit 75 to function, and the first step effect control unit 75 The first stage effect control process according to step S3 is started (step S3101). After that, when the start timing T2 of the suggestion effect 203 comes (YES in step S3102), the effect control board 33 causes the suggestion effect control unit 74 to function and starts the suggestion effect 203 by the suggestion effect control unit 74 (step S3103). Thereafter, when the start timing T3 of the second stage effect 204 comes (YES in step S3104), the effect control board 33 causes the second stage effect control unit 76 to function, and the second stage effect 204 by the second stage effect control unit 76. Is started (step S3105). Then, when the process by the second stage effect control unit 76 ends, the second scenario effect pattern control process ends.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a detailed processing procedure of the first stage effect control process (step S3101 in FIG. 65) when scenario effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A or the second scenario effect pattern B is performed. When this process is started, the first stage effect control unit 75 starts the execution of the first stage effect 200 defined in the second scenario effect pattern 782 (step S3110). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 starts title screen display (step S3111), and when a predetermined time has elapsed (YES in S3112), executes the first stage scenario effect progression process (step S3113), the first stage When the scenario rendering process is completed, the process returns.

  FIGS. 67 and 68 are flowcharts showing the detailed processing procedure of the first stage scenario presentation progress processing (step S3113 in FIG. 66). When this process is started, the first stage effect control unit 75 stands by until the start of the single hit operation accepting period (NO in step S3121), and when the single hit operation accept period comes (YES in step S3121), the player Acceptance of a single hit operation is started (step S3122). Thereafter, the first stage effect control unit 75 detects the presence or absence of the single hit operation by determining whether or not the on edge is detected (step S3123), and when the single hit operation is not detected (NO in step S3123). ), It is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3124). The predetermined time is a period in which the first single push operation of two times is received. The presence or absence of the single-press operation can be determined by referring to the first storage area of the edge storage unit 69b.

  If the first step effect control unit 75 detects a single push operation by the player within the single push operation reception valid period (YES in step S3123), the scenario progress effect based on the timing at which the single push operation is performed by the player. Is determined (step S3125), and scenario rendering execution processing is performed to advance scenario effects based on the determined degree of progress (step S3126). Subsequently, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the processing for advancing the scenario progress effect has been performed earlier than the case where the single push operation is not performed (step S3127), and the scenario effect execution processing is performed early. If it is performed (YES in step S3127), the process waits until a predetermined time elapses (step S3128). By this standby, an image is displayed in which the character 82a moves in the left and right direction of one reciprocation or two reciprocations at the destination. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3128), the process proceeds to step S3131. Further, when the processing for advancing the scenario progress presentation is not performed earlier than the case where the single-push pressing operation is not performed (NO in step S3127), the processing in step S3128 is skipped.

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect a single-press operation by the player within the single-push-operation reception valid period (NO in step S3123) and a predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3124), the first stage effect control When the player does not perform the single-press operation by the player, the unit 75 determines the stage in which the scenario progress presentation is to be advanced as the minimum advance width (step S3129). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs scenario effect execution processing for advancing the scenario effect with the minimum advance width (step S3130).

  After that, the first stage effect control unit 75 starts to receive a single hit operation by the player (step S3131). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the single edge pressing operation by the player is detected by determining whether or not the on edge is detected (step S3132), and the single level pressing operation is not detected. (NO in step S3132), it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3133). The predetermined time is a period in which the second single push operation is received.

  When a single-press operation by the player is detected within the single-push-operation reception valid period (YES in step S3132), the first stage effect control unit 75 produces a scenario progress based on the timing at which the single-push operation is performed by the player. Is determined (step S3134), and scenario rendering execution processing is performed to advance scenario rendering based on the determined degree of progress (step S3135). Subsequently, the first stage effect control unit 75 determines whether or not the process of advancing the scenario progress effect is performed earlier than the case where the single push operation is not performed (step S3136), and the scenario effect execution process is performed earlier. If it is performed (YES in step S3136), the process waits until a predetermined time elapses (step S3137). By this standby, an image is displayed in which the character 82a moves in the left and right direction of one reciprocation or two reciprocations at the destination. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3137), the first stage scenario rendering progressing process ends. If the process of advancing the scenario progress presentation has not been performed earlier than the case where the single-push operation is not performed (NO in step S3136), the process of step S3137 is skipped and the first stage scenario presentation process is ended. Do.

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect a single-push operation by the player within the single-push-operation reception valid period (NO in step S3132) and a predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3133), the first stage effect control The unit 75 determines the stage for advancing the scenario effect to be the minimum advance width when the player does not perform the single-press operation (step S3138). Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 performs scenario effect execution processing for advancing the scenario effect with the minimum advance width (step S3139). Then, the first stage scenario rendering progressing process is ended.

  In the first stage effect control process (step S3101) as described above, when the first stage effect control unit 75 starts the first stage scenario progress effect 202, the character 82a is left or right according to the result of the special game determination. The speed of swinging in the direction may be changed to change the degree of difficulty when the player performs a single hit operation according to the timing when the power storage amount of the power gauge 82c becomes maximum (100%). For example, when the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the first stage effect control unit 75 does not shift the speed at which the character 82a moves in the lateral direction to the special game state ST2. Make it slower than it is. When the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2, the first stage effect control unit 75 shifts the speed at which the character 82a swings in the left / right direction to the special game state ST2 Make it faster. As a result, the degree of difficulty to be matched with the predetermined timing when the player performs a single hit operation changes in accordance with whether or not the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, so the special game It becomes possible to adjust the progress degree of scenario progress presentation according to the result of the determination.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart of an example of a detailed process procedure of the suggestion effect control process (step S3103 of FIG. 65). When this processing is started, the suggestion effect control unit 74 first confirms the result of the special game determination made by the special game determination unit 52 (step S3141). The suggestion effect control unit 74 determines a progress pattern to be referred to at the time of the next suggestion effect progress processing based on the special game determination result (step S3142).

  More specifically, in step S3142, when the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, a plurality of suggestion game control units 74 stored in the determination table shown in FIG. 62. One of the progression patterns of is selected as a reference target at the time of suggestive effect progression processing. Further, when the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2, one of the plurality of progress patterns stored in the determination table shown in FIG. 63 is selected as a reference target during suggestion effect progression processing Do.

  Next, the suggestion effect control unit 74 executes a suggestion effect progression process (step S3143), and returns. The process of the suggestion effect progression process differs between when the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A is performed and when the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern B is performed.

  FIG. 70 and FIG. 71 are flowcharts showing an example of a detailed processing procedure of the suggestion rendering progressing process (step S3143 of FIG. 69) when the scenario progression rendering based on the second scenario rendering pattern A is performed. In this process, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines a specific period between one timing and a predetermined timing immediately before the one timing, another one timing, and a predetermined period immediately before the other timing. When the operation information indicates that the player operates the operation button 6 in the specific period between the start timing and the start time, the operation information is processed in association with the operation time in each specific period. That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 changes the execution mode of the specific game on the basis of the long press operation time in which the operation button 6 is long pressed by the player in each specific period. The details will be described below. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect progression process, it waits until the long press operation acceptance valid period starts (NO in step S3150), and when the long press operation acceptance valid period starts (in step S3150) YES) Check whether the gauge progress flag is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c, and if stored, clear the gauge progress flag in the gauge progress flag area (step S3151). Here, the gauge progress flag is a flag indicating the state of the gauge progress in the power gauge 82c. There are two types of gauge progress flags: "1" and "2". In a state where the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c is increased at a non-long press progress speed (a speed for advancing one gauge between consecutive timings within the long press operation effective period) with the gauge progress flag "1". Indicates that there is. The gauge progress flag "2" indicates that the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c is increased at a long press progressing speed (speed to reach the gauge at the stage corresponding to that timing by the next timing). Show. The gauge progress flag "no set" indicates that the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c is stopped without increasing.

  After execution of step S3151, the suggestion effect control unit 74 controls the on signal number counter in the on / off edge area in the first area of the on signal count number storage section 69d and the second area of the on signal count number storage section 69d. The accumulated on signal number counter is reset (S3152). As described above, the on / off edge on signal number counter and the cumulative on signal number counter are updated by the operation control unit 66 every two milliseconds based on the operation signal SGN. As described above, with the on / off edge on signal number counter and the cumulative on signal number counter updated based on the operation signal SGN, the suggestion effect control unit 74 operates the operation button 6, the operation button 6 It can be determined that the button is not operated and that the operation button 6 is continuously operated.

After step S3152, suggesting the performance control unit 74 in accordance with progression pattern determined in step S3142, it sets the arrival step of the gauge progression in a specific time period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ (step S3153). To be more specific, in step S3142 of FIG. 69, if the advance pattern 101 in the determination table in FIG. 62 has been selected, the arrival phase of a particular period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ in accordance with the progress pattern Set to "1st gauge". Further, for example, in step S3142 of FIG. 69, if the advance pattern 205 in the determination table in FIG. 62 has been selected, "No progress reaching the stage of a particular period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ in accordance with the progress pattern Set to ".

  The suggestion effect control unit 74 starts receiving a long press operation by the player (step S3154). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the operation button 6 is in the operation state (step S3155). Specifically, the suggestion effect control unit 74 refers to the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c of the RAM 33c, and "1" is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c. If the operation button 6 is in the operation state, it is determined that the operation button 6 is in the non-operation state if "0" is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c. . As described above, in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c, "1" is written from when the on edge of the operation signal SGN from the operation button 6 is detected to when the off edge is detected. Then, "0" is written from when the off edge is detected to when the on edge is detected.

  If it is determined in step S3155 that the operation button 6 is in the operation state (YES in step S3155), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3156. If it is determined that the operation button 6 is in the non-operation state (NO in step S3155), the process advances to step S3163.

In step S3156, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the setting stage of the current applicable period in the long press operation reception effective period is “no progress”. For example, a certain period of the current relevant period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 _1, if the "first gauge" has been set in step S3153, the determination result of this step is "NO", "no progress If “is set, the determination result of this step is“ YES ”. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the setting step of the current applicable period is not “no progress” (NO in step S3156), the process proceeds to step S3157. If it is determined that the setting stage of the current applicable period is "no progress" (YES in step S3156), the process advances to step S3163.

  In step S3157, the suggestion effect control unit 74 confirms whether or not the gauge progress flag is “not set” in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. When the gauge progress flag is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in S3157), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3158. If one of the gauge progress flags "1" and "2" is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in S3157), the process proceeds to step S3160.

  In step S3158, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets, in the transmission buffer 68 of the RAM 33c, a command instructing the start of the progression of the gauge at the non-long press progression speed. Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag “1” in the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3159). The command set in the transmission buffer 68 in step S3158 is immediately transmitted to the image control board 34. At the time of transmission of this command, the progress of the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 82c being displayed on the screen of the image display 12 is stopped. When receiving this command, the image control board 34 starts an increase in the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 82c at a non-long push advancing speed. After execution of step S3159, the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3169.

  In step S3160, the suggestion effect control unit 74 confirms whether the gauge progress flag "1" is set in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. When the gauge advance flag “1” is set in the gauge advance flag storage area (YES in S3160), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3161. If the gauge progress flag “1” is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in S3160), the process proceeds to step S3169.

  In step S3161, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the on-off-edge on-signal number counter in the first storage area of the on-signal count count storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value in this step S3161 is a half of the specific period within the long press operation reception valid period (a time 1/10 of the long press operation reception valid period itself) of the operation signal SGN from the operation button 6 It is desirable that the sampling interval is divided by 2 milliseconds. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the on-off edge on signal number counter is not greater than or equal to the predetermined value (NO in S3161), the continuation operation time of the operation button 6 can be determined to be a long press operation. It is determined that the time has not been reached, and the process proceeds to step S3162. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the on-off edge on signal number counter is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (YES in S3161), the continuous operation time of the operation button 6 has reached a length that can be determined to be long press Then, the process proceeds to step S3167.

  In step S3162, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the cumulative on signal number counter in the second storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Here, also for the predetermined value in step S3162, sampling of the operation signal SGN of the operation button 6 is performed for a half of the specific period within the long press operation acceptance valid period (a time of 1/10 of the long press operation acceptance valid period itself). It is desirable that the value be divided by 2 milliseconds, which is an interval. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the cumulative on signal number counter is not greater than or equal to the predetermined value (NO in S3162), the total time of the continuous operation time of each of a plurality of operations after the start point of the current specific period It judges that it has not reached the length which can be judged that it is long press operation, and it progresses to Step S3163. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the cumulative on signal number counter is equal to or more than the predetermined value (YES in S3162), the total of the continuous operation time of each of a plurality of operations after the start point of the current specific period It is determined that the time has reached a length that can be determined to be a long press operation, and the process proceeds to step S3167.

  In step S3163, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a has reached the previous step 84e. Here, as described above, a long press operation (an operation including at least one of an original long press operation and an operation not regarded as the original long press operation but regarded as a long press operation) is performed on the operation button 6. If the power storage amount reaches the previous step 84e without being determined, the increase of the power storage amount ahead of the previous step 84e is limited unless the long press operation is performed. If it is determined in step S3163 that the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a has reached the immediately preceding step 84e (YES in step S3163), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3164.

  In step S3164, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the gauge advance flag "2" is set in the gauge advance flag storage area. When it is determined that the gauge progress flag "2" is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in step S3164), the suggestion effect control unit 74 instructs to limit the increase of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a. The command is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3165). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 clears the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3166). The command set in the transmission buffer 68 in step S3165 is immediately transmitted to the image control board 34. At the time of transmission of this command, the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 82c being displayed on the image display 12 is advancing at a non-long press advancing speed. When the image control board 34 receives this command, the image control board 34 stops the increase of the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c. The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3169 after executing step S3166. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag "2" is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3164), step S3165 and step S3166 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S3169.

In step S3167, suggesting the performance control unit 74 sets power storage amount in the power gauge 84a in certain timing _T2 1 of the end point of the _{period, T2 2, T2 3, T2} 4, or T3 of the current applicable is for the specific time period The speed at which the gauge reaches the stage is set as the long press progress speed, and a command instructing increase of the power storage amount at the long press progress speed is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3167). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag “2” in the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3168). The command set in the transmission buffer 68 in step S3168 is immediately transmitted to the image control board 34. At the time of transmission of this command, the amount of stored power in the power gauge 82c being displayed on the image display 12 is progressing at the non-long press advancing speed or stopped at the immediately preceding step 84e. When the image control board 34 receives this command, it starts to increase the amount of accumulated power at the long press traveling speed indicated by the command. Then, the image control board 34 increases the power storage amount to the gauge of the stage set for the corresponding specific period in the power gauge 82c, and when it reaches the gauge corresponding to the relevant gauge, the display color of the power storage amount Change the color to the corresponding specific period. The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3169 after execution of step S3168.

In step S3169, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the timing T2 ₁ , the timing T2 ₂ , the timing T2 ₃ , or the timing T2 ₄ has arrived. When it is determined that the timing T2 ₁ , the timing T2 ₂ , the timing T2 ₃ , the timing T2 ₄ , or the timing T3 has come (YES in step S3169), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3170. If it is determined that the timing T2 ₁ , the timing T2 ₂ , the timing T2 ₃ , the timing T2 ₄ , or the timing T3 has not come (NO in step S3169), the process proceeds to step S3174.

  In step S3170, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the gauge progress flag "2" is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area. When it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3170), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3171. In step S3171, the suggestion effect control unit 74 clears the gauge progress flag storage area, and proceeds to step S3172. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag "2" is not stored in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in step S3170), step S3171 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S3172.

In step S3172, the suggestion effect control unit 74 controls the on signal count counter between the on and off edges in the first storage area of the on signal count count storage unit 69d and the cumulative on in the second storage area of the on signal count count storage unit 69d. Reset the signal counter. Here, as described above, the on-off edge on signal number counter is a switch from when the on edge of the operation signal SGN from the operation button 6 in the long press operation valid period is detected to when the off edge is detected. It counts the sampling number of the ON signal, and is used to obtain information associated with the continuous operation time of the operation button 6. The accumulated ON signal number counter counts the sampling number of the switch ON signal of the operation signal SGN of the operation button 6 (the number of signals in the switch ON state) within the long press operation valid period, and the movable operation button 6 is movable It is used to obtain information associated with the time when the body 6a is being operated. In this embodiment, each time the determination timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 arrives (YES in step S3169), the process proceeds to step S3172 to count the number of ON signals between ON and OFF edges and the number of accumulated ON signals. by resetting the counter, the timing _T2 1 from the timing T2 _0, T2 ₁ from the timing _T2 2, T2 ₂ from the timing _T2 3, T2 ₃ from the timing T2 _4, or an operation signal of each particular period from T2 ₄ to timing T3 Process SGN in association with operation time in each specific period. Then, as described later, it is possible to change the execution mode of the specific game effect based on the long press operation time (including the operation time and the operation time by adding a plurality of operation times) in each specific period.

After execution of step S3172, the gauge for a specific period starting from the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ or T2 ₄ determined as having reached in step S3169 according to the progression pattern determined in step S3142 according to the progression pattern determined in step S3142 The arrival stage of the progression is set (step S3173). After performing step S3173, the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3174. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 has not been reached (NO in step S3169), steps S3171, S3172 and S3173 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S3174.

In step S3174, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the end timing T3 of the long press operation acceptance valid period has come. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the end timing T3 of the long press operation acceptance valid period has not come (NO in step S3174), the process returns to step S3155 to repeat the subsequent processing. If it is determined that the end timing T3 of the long press operation acceptance valid period has come (YES in step S3174), the suggestion effect progression processing is terminated, and the process returns. In suggesting effect development processing scenario progression effect based on such second scenario effect pattern A, in one of the determination timing of the determination timing T2 _1, T2 _2, T2 ₃ and T2 _4, immediately before the one of the determination timing If it is determined that the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 in the specific period between the predetermined start timing of the gauge, a gauge equivalent to the case where the long press operation is performed at the determination timing before the one determination timing Progress processing may be performed. That is, the execution mode of the specific game effect may be changed as in the case where the long press effect is performed at the previous timing.

The above-described suggestion effect progression processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Figure 72 is a specific period from the traveling patterns 102 (timing T2 ₀ the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T2 0 to T3) to the preceding progression pattern determination process (step S3142) until the timing T2 ₁ is "first gauge", the timing T2 certain period from ₁ to the timing T2 ₂ is "second gauge", the specific periods specified period from the timing T2 ₂ until the timing T2 ₃ from "third gauge", the timing T2 ₃ to the timing T2 ₄ is "4 gauge ", a particular period from the timing T2 ₄ to the time T3 is the operation of the operation buttons 6 of the long press operation accepting validity period (T2 0 _{to T3)} in the case of traveling pattern for each proceed to" MAX ") is selected It is a figure which shows an example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation screen which concerns on the suggestion production | presentation 203 according to this.

In the example of FIG. 72, four operations of the operation buttons 6 on the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T2 0 _{to T3)} have been made. In the first operation of four times, the operated operation button 6 within a certain period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 _1, within a specified time period from the timing T2 ₁ to the timing T2 ₂ operation state of the operation button 6 It has been released. In the second operation, the operation button 6 is operated within a specific time period from the timing T2 ₂ until the timing T2 _3, the operation state of the operation button 6 is released within a certain time period from the timing T2 ₃ to the timing T2 ₄ . In the third operation, the operation button 6 within a certain period from the timing T2 ₄ until time T3 operation and the releasing of the operation states has been made. In the fourth operation, the operated operation button 6 within a certain period from the timing T2 ₄ to timing T3, are to remain operated until the timing T3 is the end time of the long press operation accepting lifetime.

In the scenario progress effect of the second scenario effect pattern A in the case where the operation such as in the example of FIG. 72 is performed, a certain time period from a particular period and the timing T2 ₁ from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ to the timing T2 ₂ first operation performed across both periods of is determined to be the long press operation, in response to the timing T2 ₁ to reach a power storage amount in the power gauge 82c to the first gauge. Further, third and fourth operation performed in a specific time period from the timing T2 ₄ to timing T3 is also determined to be a long press operation, in response to the timing T3 to the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c to MAX To reach.

  More specifically, at the start timing T2 of the long press operation acceptance effective period in the example of FIG. 72, the determination result of step S3150 in FIG. 70 is YES, and the processing proceeds as step S3151 → step S3152 → step S3153 → step S3154. The reception of the long press operation is started. Since the operation button 6 is in the non-operation state from the start timing T2 of the long press operation acceptance effective period until the first operation is performed, the step S3155 NO → the step S3163 NO → the step S3169 NO → step The processing of NO in step S3174 in step S3155 is repeated.

  When the first operation is performed, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that becomes YES, the process proceeds from NO in step S3156 → YES in step S3157 → step S3158, and the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c is not pressed long An increase in the speed of progression begins. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3159 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. After that, until the predetermined time (for example, 1/10 of the long press operation acceptance effective period) reaches the continuation operation time after the first operation is considered to be a long press, YES in step S3155 → NO in step S3156 → The process of NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

When the continuous operation time after the first operation reaches a predetermined time (for example, 1/10 of the long-press operation acceptance effective period) which is considered to be long press, the determination result of step S3161 immediately after that becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step S3167 The speed of increase of the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c changes from the non-long push advancing speed to the long push advancing speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3168 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _1, the process of NO → step S3155 of NO → step S3174 of NO → step S3169 of NO → step S3160 of NO → step S3157 of YES → Step S3156 in step S3155 is repeated. During this period, increase in the power storage amount in the advancing speed hold proceeds and the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c at the timing T2 ₁ reaches the first gauge, the display color of the power storage amount is changed to blue.

When it is time T2 _1, setting the determination result is YES in the immediately following step S1169, advances processing as YES → Step S3171 → step S3172 → step S3173 in step S3170 "second gauge" as the next phase of the gauge progress Be done. Thereafter, the process proceeds from NO in step S3174 → YES in step S3155 → NO in step S3156 → YES in step S3157 → step S3158, and the speed at which the power storage amount increases in the power gauge 82c is a long press Return to the speed of progress. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3159 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until the first operation is released, YES in step S3155 → NO in step S3156 → NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 → The process of NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → the process in step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

When the first operation is canceled, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174. Here, in the example of FIG. 72, the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c has increased the power storage amount of the non-long-pressing the moving speed from the time of reaching the first gauge (timing T2 ₁₎ progresses, non traveling velocity hold, since the speed at which the process proceeds gauge one minute between the timing T2 ₁ and T2 _2, power storage amount reaches the stage immediately before the second gauge before the timing T2 _2. Therefore, after the release of the first operation, until the power storage amount reaches the stage immediately before the second gauge, NO in step S3155 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. The process is repeated.

When the power accumulation amount in progress at the non-long press advancing speed reaches the stage immediately before the second gauge, the determination result in step S3163 immediately after that becomes YES, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3164 to step S3165 to select the power gauge. The progress of the increase of the power storage amount in 82c stops. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3166 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _2, processing of NO → step S3155 of NO → step S3174 of NO → step S3169 of NO → step S3163 in step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in power storage amount stops.

When it is time T2 _2, the judgment result of the immediately following step S3169 becomes to YES, advances processing as NO → step S3172 → step S3173 in step S3170 "third gauge" is set as the next phase of the gauge progress . Thereafter, the process proceeds from NO in step S3174 to step S3155. Thereafter, until the second operation is performed, the process of NO in step S3155 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in power storage amount stops.

When the second operation is performed, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that becomes YES, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3156 → YES in step S3157 → step S3158, and the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c is not pressed long An increase in the speed of progression begins. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3159 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _3, in step S3155 YES → Step S3156 NO → of NO → step S3160 in step S3157 YES → Step S3161 NO → step S3162 NO → step S3163 NO → step S3169 The processing of NO → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

When it is time T2 _3, the determination result of the immediately following step S3169 becomes to YES, advances processing as NO → step S3172 → step S3173 in step S3170 "fourth gauge" is set as the next phase of the gauge progress . Thereafter, the process proceeds from NO in step S3174 to step S3155. Thereafter, until the second operation is released, YES in step S3155 → NO in step S3156 → NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 → The process of NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → the process in step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

When the second operation is canceled, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174. Here, in the example of FIG. 72, a time point slightly before even than the timing T2 ₃ for power storage amount that has been stopped just before step begins to increase in the non-long press running speed of the second gauge, non traveling velocity hold, since a gauge one minute proceeds speed between the timing T2 ₃ and T2 _4, does not power storage amount reaches the stage immediately before the fourth gauge before timing T2 _4. Thus, after release of the second operation, until reaching the timing T2 _4, the process of NO → step S3155 of NO → step S3174 of NO → step S3169 of NO → step S3163 in step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

When it is time T2 _4, the determination result of the immediately following step S3169 becomes to YES, advances processing as NO → step S3172 → step S3173 in step S3170 "MAX" is set as the next step of the gauge progress. Thereafter, the process proceeds from NO in step S3174 to step S3155. Thereafter, until the third operation is performed, the process of NO in step S3155 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

  When the third operation is performed, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that becomes YES, NO in step S3156 → NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 The processing proceeds as NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until the third operation is released, YES in step S3155 → NO in step S3156 → NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 → The process of NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → the process in step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

  When the third operation is canceled, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Subsequently, until the fourth operation is performed, the process of NO in step S3155 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

  When the fourth operation is performed, the determination result in step S3155 immediately after that becomes YES, NO in step S3156 → NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 The processing proceeds as NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. From then on, until the total time of the continuation operation time of the third operation and the continuation operation time of the fourth operation reaches a predetermined time considered as long press (for example, 1/10 time of the long press operation acceptance effective period) Step S3155 YES → step S3156 NO → step S3157 NO → step S3160 YES → step S3161 NO → step S3162 NO → step S3163 NO → step S3169 NO → step S3174 NO → step S3155 Is repeated.

  When the total time of the continuous operation time of the third operation and the continuous operation time of the fourth operation reaches a predetermined time, the determination result of step S3162 immediately after that becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step S3167 and the power in the power gauge 82c The rate of increase of the accumulated amount changes from the non-long push advancing speed to the long push advancing speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3168 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155. Thereafter, until the timing T3, the process of YES of step S3155 → NO of step S3156 → NO of step S3157 → NO of step S3160 → NO of step S3169 → NO of step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. During this time, the increase in power storage amount at the long press advancing speed progresses, and at timing T3, the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c reaches MAX, and the display color of the power storage amount changes to rainbow.

  FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are flowcharts showing an example of a detailed processing procedure of the suggestion rendering progressing process (step S3143 of FIG. 69) when the scenario progress rendering based on the second scenario rendering pattern B is performed. In this process, the suggestion effect control unit 74 operates the operation information at each of a plurality of timings set in the long press operation reception effective period, which is one of the predetermined periods determined based on the effect. It is determined whether or not the That is, the suggestion effect control unit 74 changes the execution mode of the specific game effect on the condition that the operation button 6 is operated at one of the plurality of timings. The details will be described below. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts the suggestion effect progression process, it waits until the long press operation acceptance valid period starts (NO in step S3180), and when the long press operation acceptance valid period starts (step S3180) YES) It is checked whether the gauge progress flag is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c, and if stored, the gauge progress flag in the gauge progress flag area is cleared (step S3181).

After execution of step S3181, the suggestion effect control unit 74 resets the on signal number counter between on and off edges in the first storage area of the on signal count number storage unit 69d (S3182). After step S3182, suggesting the performance control unit 74 in accordance with progression pattern determined in step S3142, it sets the arrival step of the gauge progress in the period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ (step S3183).

  After execution of step S3183, the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts accepting the long press operation by the player (step S3184). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the operation button 6 is in the operation state (step S3185). When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the operation button 6 is in the operation state in step S3185 (YES in step S3185), the process proceeds to step S3186. If it is determined that the operation button 6 is in the non-operation state (NO in step S3185), the process proceeds to step S3192.

  In step S3186, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the setting stage of the current applicable period in the long press operation reception valid period is “no progress”. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the setting step of the current applicable period is “no progress” (YES in step S3186), the process proceeds to step S3192. If it is determined that the setting stage of the current applicable period is not "no progress" (NO in step S3186), the process advances to step S3187.

  In step S3187, the suggestion effect control unit 74 confirms whether or not the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c is the gauge progress flag “no setting”. When the gauge progress flag is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in S3187), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3188. If one of the gauge progress flags "1" and "2" is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in S3187), the process proceeds to step S3190.

  In step S3188, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets, in the transmission buffer 68 of the RAM 33c, a command instructing the start of the progression of the gauge at the non-long press progression speed. Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag “1” in the gauge progress flag storage area (S3189). After execution of step S3189, the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3198.

  In step S3190, the suggestion effect control unit 74 confirms whether or not the gauge progress flag "1" is set in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. When the gauge progress flag “1” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in S3190), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3191. If the gauge progress flag "1" is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in S3190), the process proceeds to step S3198.

  In step S3191, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the on-off-edge on-signal number counter in the first storage area of the on-signal count count storage unit 69d of the RAM 33c is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value in step S3191 is a half of the specific period within the long press operation reception valid period (for example, 1/10 of the long press operation reception valid period itself) of the operation signal SGN of the operation button 6 It is desirable that the sampling interval is divided by 2 milliseconds. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the on-off edge on signal number counter is not greater than or equal to the predetermined value (NO in step S3191), the continuous operation time of the operation button 6 after the start point of the current applicable period is long pressed It is considered that the length which can be determined as not reached and the process proceeds to step S3192. When it is determined that the on-off edge on signal number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (YES in step S3191), the suggested effect control unit 74 has a long continuous operation time of the operation button 6 after the start point of the current applicable period. It is determined that the length that can be determined to be a push has been reached, and the flow proceeds to step S3196.

  In step S3192, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a has reached the previous step 84e. When it is determined that the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a has reached the immediately preceding step 84e (YES in step S3192), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3193.

  In step S3193, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the gauge progress flag “2” is set in the gauge progress flag storage area. When it is determined that the gauge progress flag "2" is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in step S3194), the suggestion effect control unit 74 instructs to limit the increase of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a. The command is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3194). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 clears the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3195). The command set in the transmission buffer 68 in step S3194 is immediately transmitted to the image control board 34. At the time of transmission of this command, the amount of accumulated power in the power gauge 82c being displayed on the image display 12 is advancing at a non-long press advancing speed. When the image control board 34 receives this command, the image control board 34 stops the increase of the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c. The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3198 after executing step S3195. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag "2" is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3193), step S3194 and step S3195 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S3198.

  In step S3196, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets, in the transmission buffer 68, a command instructing an increase in the long push progress speed of the power storage amount in the power gauge 84a. Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag “2” in the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3197). The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3198 after executing step S3197.

In step S3198, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the immediately preceding determination timing T2a ₁ , T2a ₂ , T2a ₃ , T2a ₄ or T3a has been reached. Here, as shown in FIG. 75, immediately before the determination timing _{T2a 1,} it is T2a _2, T2a 3, respectively T2a ₄ and T3a, determination timing _{T2 1, T2 2, T2 3} , T2 4 and T3a predetermined immediately before the It is timing. When it is determined that the immediately preceding determination timing T2a ₁ , T2a ₂ , T2a ₃ , T2a ₄ or T3a has been reached (YES in step S3198), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3199. If it is determined that the immediately preceding determination timing T2a ₂ , T2a ₃ , T2a ₄ or T3a has not been reached (NO in step S3198), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3203.

  In step S3199, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the gauge advance flag "2" is set in the gauge advance flag storage area. When it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is not set in the gauge progress flag storage area (NO in step S3199), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3200. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag "2" is set in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3199), the process advances to step S3203.

  In step S3200, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the operation button 6 is in the operation state. Specifically, the suggestion effect control unit 74 refers to the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c of the RAM 33c, and "1" is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c. If the operation button 6 is in the operation state, it is determined that the operation button 6 is in the non-operation state when "0" is written in the first storage area of the on-edge count number storage unit 69c. .

  In step S3200, when the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the operation button 6 is in the operation state (YES in step S3200), the process proceeds to step S3201. If it is determined that the operation button 6 is in the non-operation state (NO in step S3200), the process advances to step S3203.

In step S3201, suggesting the performance control unit 74, a power storage amount in the power gauge 84a at timing _{T2 1, T2 2, T2 3} , T2 4 or T3, which is the end point of the specified period of the current applicable is for the specific period setting The speed at which the gauge reaches the stage is set as the long press progress speed, and a command instructing increase of the power storage amount at the long press progress speed is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3201). Subsequently, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets the gauge progress flag "2" in the gauge progress flag storage area (step S3202). After performing step S3202, the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3208.

Here, in the suggestion rendering progress processing (FIG. 70 and FIG. 71) when the suggestion rendering progression processing of the scenario progression rendering based on the second scenario rendering pattern A is performed, the total of the plurality of continuous operation times in the specific period If the time has reached a predetermined value (if the cumulative on signal number counter is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (YES in step S3162 in FIG. 70), the process proceeds to step S3167 to increase the power storage amount in the long press operation progression time. On the other hand, in the suggestion production proceeding process in the case where the suggestion production proceeding process (FIGS. 73 and 74) of scenario proceeding presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern B is performed, a step corresponding to step S3162 in FIG. Instead, the operation button 6 is operated at the determination timing immediately before the end timing of the corresponding specific period. If there is step S3198, S3199 and S3200 to determine whether or not the operation button 6 is in the operating state at the immediately preceding determination timing (YES in step S3200), the process proceeds to step S3201 and the long press operation progress time starts increasing the power storage amount. also suggested effect development processing of such a scenario progression effect based on the second scenario effect pattern B, determination timing T2 _1, T2 _2, T2 ₃ or T2 one determination timing of the _four If it is determined that the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 in a specific period between the predetermined timing immediately before the one determination timing and the determination timing before the one determination timing. You may perform the same gauge progression processing as when the operation was being performed. If it is determined that the long press operation is performed on the operation button 6 in the specific period between the predetermined start timing immediately before the determination timing of, the same specification as in the case where the long press effect is performed in the previous timing The execution mode of the game effect may be changed.

In step S3203, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ or T2 ₄ has been reached. When it is determined that the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 has come (YES in step S3203), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3204. If it is determined that the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 has not been reached (NO in step S3203), the process proceeds to step S3208.

  In step S3204, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether the gauge progress flag "2" is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag “2” is stored in the gauge progress flag storage area (YES in step S3204), the suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3205. In step S3205, the suggestion effect control unit 74 clears the gauge progress flag storage area, and proceeds to step S3206. If it is determined that the gauge progress flag "2" is not stored in the gauge progress flag storage area of the RAM 33c (NO in step S3204), step S3205 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S3206.

  In step S3206, the suggestion effect control unit 74 controls the on signal count counter between the on and off edges in the first storage area of the on signal count count storage 69d of the RAM 33c and the second storage area of the on signal count count storage 69d. Reset the cumulative on signal counter.

After execution of step S3206, the gauge for a specific period starting from the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ or T2 ₄ determined to have arrived at step S3203 according to the progression pattern determined at step S3142 after the suggestion effect control unit 74 starts. The arrival stage of the progression is set (step S3207). The suggestion effect control unit 74 proceeds to step S3208 after execution of step S3207. When it is determined that the timing T2 ₁ , T2 ₂ , T2 ₃ , T2 ₄ or T3 has not been reached (NO in step S3203), the suggestion effect control unit 74 skips steps S3205, S3206 and S3207, and proceeds to step S3208.

  In step S3208, the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines whether or not the end timing T3 of the long press operation acceptance valid period has come. When the suggestion effect control unit 74 determines that the end timing T3 of the long press operation acceptance valid period has not come (NO in step S3208), the process returns to step S3185, and the subsequent processing is repeated. In addition, when it is determined that the end timing T3 of the long press operation acceptance valid period has come (YES in step S3106), the suggestion effect control unit 74 ends the suggestion effect progression processing, and returns.

The above-described suggestion effect development processing will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. Figure 76 is a specific period from the traveling patterns 102 (timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ in the development pattern determination process prior to the pressing operation accepting validity period _(T2 0 to T3) (Step S3142) The "first gauge", the timing T2 The specific period from ₁ to T2 ₂ is "second gauge", the specific period from T2 ₂ to T ₃ is "3rd gauge", and the specific period from T2 ₃ to T2 ₄ is "4th gauge""specified period from the timing T2 ₄ to the time T3 is this the operation of the operation buttons 6 of the long press operation accepting validity period (T2 0 _{to T3)} in the case of traveling pattern for each proceed to" MAX ") is selected It is a figure which shows an example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation screen which concerns on the suggestion production | presentation 203 according to. The four operations in this example and the timing of releasing the operation state are the same as those in FIG.

In the scenario progress effect of the second scenario effect pattern B in the case where the operation such as in the example of FIG. 76 is performed, similarly to the scenario progression effect of the second scenario the effect pattern A (FIG. 72), the timing from the timing T2 ₀ T2 first operation performed across both periods of a particular time period from a specific period and the timing T2 ₁ to the timing T2 ₂ to ₁ is determined to be the long press operation, the power gauge corresponds to the timing T2 ₁ The power storage amount in 82c is caused to reach the first gauge. Unlike the scenario progress effect based on the second scenario effect pattern A, it was conducted across both periods of a particular time period from a specific period and the timing T2 ₃ from the timing T2 ₂ to the time T2 ₃ to timing T2 ₄ 2 times th operation also is determined to be the long press operation, in response to the timing T2 ₁ to reach a power storage amount in the power gauge 82c to the third gauge. Further, the fourth operation performed in a specific time period from the timing T2 ₄ to timing T3 is also determined to be a long press operation, in response to the timing T3 to reach the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c to MAX.

When the scenario progress effect of the second scenario performance pattern A by focusing on differences from the (FIG. 72) (timing T2 ₂ or later) will be described more specifically, particular from the timing T2 ₂ in the example of FIG. 76 to the timing T2 ₃ When the operation is performed during the period, the determination result in step S3185 immediately after that becomes YES, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3186 → YES in step S3187 → step S3188 and the power accumulation amount in the power gauge 82c is not pushed forward An increase in speed begins. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3198 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185. Thereafter, until reaching just before the timing T2a ₃ timing T2 _3, in step S3185 YES → of NO → step S3190 of NO → step S3187 in step S3186 YES → Step S3191 NO → step S3192 NO → step S3198 The processing of NO → NO of step S3203 → NO of step S3208 → the process of step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

Becomes immediately before the timing T2a ₃ timing T2 _3, step decision result of S3198 becomes to YES, the speed of increase of the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c advances the processing and YES → Step S3201 of NO → step S3200 in step S3199 Changes from the non-long push advancing speed to the long push advancing speed. After that, the process proceeds from step S3201 to step S3208. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _3, in step S3185 YES → Step S3186 NO → of NO → step S3198 of NO → step S3190 in step S3187 YES → Step S3199 YES → Step S3203 NO → step S3208 The process of step S3185 is repeated. During this period, increase in the power storage amount in the advancing speed hold proceeds and the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c at the timing T2 ₁ reaches the third gauge, display color of the power storage amount is changed to blue.

When it is time T2 _3, the determination result of the immediately following step S3203 becomes to YES, advances processing as YES → Step S3205 → step S3206 → step S3207 in step S3204 "fourth gauge" as the next phase of the gauge progress It is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds from NO in step S3208 → NO in step S3185 → NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → step S3188, and the speed of increase of the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c is long press Return to the speed of progress. Thereafter, the process proceeds from step S3189 → NO in step S3198 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185. Thereafter, until the second operation is canceled, YES in step S3185 → NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → YES in step S3190 → NO in step S3191 → NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → The process of NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

When the second operation is canceled, the determination result in step S3185 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208. Thereafter, until reaching the timing T2 _4, the process of NO → step S3185 of NO → step S3208 of NO → step S3203 of NO → step S3198 of NO → step S3192 in step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

When it is time T2 _4, the determination result of the immediately following step S3203 becomes to YES, advances processing as NO → step S3206 → step S3207 in step S3204 "MAX" is set as the next step of the gauge progress. Thereafter, the process proceeds from NO in step S3208 to step S3185. Thereafter, until the third operation is performed, the process of NO in step S3185 → NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

  When the third operation is performed, the determination result in step S3185 immediately after that becomes YES, NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → YES in step S3190 → NO in step S3191 → NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 The process proceeds as NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185. Thereafter, until the third operation is released, YES in step S3185 → NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → YES in step S3190 → NO in step S3191 → NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → The process of NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

  When the third operation is canceled, the determination result in step S3185 immediately after that is NO, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185. Thereafter, until the fourth operation is performed, the process of NO in step S3185 → NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase of the power storage amount at the non-long push advancing speed progresses.

  When the fourth operation is performed, the determination result in step S3185 immediately after that becomes YES, NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → YES in step S3190 → NO in step S3191 → NO in step S3192 → NO in step S3198 The process proceeds as NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185. In the example of FIG. 74, the continuous operation time after the fourth operation does not reach the predetermined time considered to be a long press by the timing T3a immediately before the timing T3. Therefore, after the fourth operation, until timing T3a immediately before timing T3 is reached, YES in step S3185 → NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → YES in step S3190 → NO in step S3191 → NO in step S3192 The process of NO in step S3198 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 → step S3185 is repeated.

  When timing T3a immediately before timing T3 comes, the determination result in step S3198 is YES, and the process proceeds from NO in step S3199 → YES in step S3200 → step S3201, and the speed of increase of the power storage amount in power gauge 82c is not It changes from long press progress speed to long press progress speed. After that, the process proceeds from step S3202 to step S3208. Thereafter, until timing T3, YES in step S3185 → NO in step S3186 → NO in step S3187 → NO in step S3190 → YES in step S3198 → YES in step S3199 → NO in step S3203 → NO in step S3208 The process of step S3185 is repeated. During this time, the increase in power storage amount at the long press advancing speed progresses, and at timing T3, the power storage amount in the power gauge 82c reaches MAX, and the display color of the power storage amount changes to rainbow.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a detailed processing procedure of the second stage effect control process (step S3105 in FIG. 65). When this process is started, the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the second stage scenario progress presentation 205 (step S3300). Thereafter, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not the final result notification effect 206 to be performed next to the second stage scenario progress effect 205 is the success effect 207 (step S3301). For example, when the result of the special game determination made by the special game determination unit 52 is to shift to the special game state ST2, the second stage effect control unit 76 shifts the result of the special game determination to the special game state ST2 It is determined that the success effect 207 is performed with a higher probability than when it is not a thing. As a result, when it is the success effect 207 (YES in step S3301), the second stage effect control unit 76 starts the success effect 207 at the start timing T4 of the success effect 207 (step S3302). On the other hand, if the final result notification effect 206 is not the success effect 207 but the failure effect 208 or 209 (NO in step S3301), the second stage effect control unit 76 fails the failure effect at the start timing T4 of the failure effect 208 or 209 Step 208 or 209 is started (step S3303). After starting the failure effect 209, the second stage effect control unit 76 determines whether or not to perform the resurrection effect 210 (step S3304). As a result, when the resurrection effect 210 is performed (YES in step S3304), the second stage effect control unit 76 waits until the start timing T5 of the resurrection effect 210 (step S3305), and when the start timing T4 of the resurrection effect 210 YES in step S3305) and start the resurrection effect 210 (step S3306). When the resurrection effect 210 is not performed after the failure effect 209 (NO in step S3304), the processes of steps S3305 and S3306 are skipped. This is the end of the second stage effect control process.

  As described above, when the scenario progress presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782 is performed in the presentation control board 33, the first stage presentation control unit 75, the suggested presentation control unit 74, and the second stage presentation in the presentation control board 33 The control unit 76 functions in this order. Then, the first stage effect control unit 75 first causes the first stage scenario effect 202 to progress scenario progress effect to a different first stage according to the timing when the single push operation on the operation button 6 is received. After the one-step scenario effect 202, the scenario progress effect proceeds from the first stage to the final stage in response to the suggestion effect control unit 74 receiving the long press operation on the operation button 6 based on the result of the special game determination. The suggestion effect 203 is performed to indicate the degree of expectation. Furthermore, after the suggestion effect 203, the second stage effect control unit 76 is a success effect 207 in which the scenario progress effect progresses from the first stage to the final stage after the second stage scenario progress effect 205, a failure not to progress to the final stage One of the effect 208 and the effect of performing the resurrection effect 210 after the failure effect 209 is performed. When the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2, the second stage effect control unit 76 has a higher probability than when the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2. It is comprised so that success production | generation 207 may be performed.

  Therefore, when scenario progress presentation based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782 is performed, the player expects the scenario progress presentation to proceed to the final stage and success presentation 207 is performed, and at least the first stage presentation control unit When the effect by the instruction 75 and the suggestion effect control unit 74 is being performed, the operation on the operation button 6 is positively performed to advance the scenario progress effect toward the final stage. That is, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can cause the player to perform the button operation positively by performing the scenario progress presentation described above based on the second scenario presentation pattern 782, and moreover, it is more interesting than before. It will be possible to perform high-quality presentation.

  As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, you may add the following deformation | transformation to this embodiment.

  In the suggestion effect advancing process shown in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 previously, the indication effect control unit 74 sets a plurality of timings set to the long press operation reception valid period which is one of the predetermined periods determined based on the effect. When it is determined that the operation information indicates the operation state in each of the above, the reaching stage of the gauge may be set by the gauge stage skipping lottery. Here, the “gauge step skip lottery” is a lottery performed triggered by the detection of the operation state of the operation switch 6 at the immediately preceding determination timing, and at least at the reaching stage of the gauge progress already set according to the progress pattern. One step is to reset the arrival stage to move forward. Below, the gauge step skip lottery is simply abbreviated as a lottery.

  The flowcharts of FIG. 78 and FIG. 79 show another example in which the processing procedure of the suggestion effect progression processing of FIG. 74 is changed from such a viewpoint. The flowchart of FIG. 73 is the same processing procedure in this improved example. Hereinafter, in the flowcharts of FIG. 78 and FIG. 79, the steps relating to the same processes as the steps of FIG. As shown in the figure, the suggested effect control unit 74 reaches the immediately preceding determination timing (YES in step S3198), and when the gauge progress flag = 2 (NO in step S3199), the operation switch 6 is in the operating state. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3200), and if it is in the operation state (YES in step S3200), it is determined whether it has already been drawn (step S3501). Here, it is determined whether or not the drawing has already been made, because the process becomes complicated after the drawing is performed at one place of a plurality of immediately prior determination timings set within the long press operation reception valid period. In order to avoid this, the re-lottery is not performed at the subsequent immediately preceding determination timing. When it is determined that the suggestion effect control unit 74 has not drawn (NO at step S3501), the drawing is performed (step S3502), and the reaching stage is set based on the result of the drawing (step S3503). A command instructing an increase of the power storage amount is set in the transmission buffer 68 (step S3201). On the other hand, if the lottery has already been made (YES in step S3501), steps S3502 and S3503 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S3201. The subsequent processing is basically as described above with reference to FIG. 74. However, when it is determined that the operation information indicates the operation state at the next immediately preceding determination timing, the next arrival which has already been set is not performed. This is different from the processing described with reference to FIG. 74 in that the gauge is advanced to a stage (step S3505).

  According to such processing, when it is determined that the operation information indicates the operation state at the immediately preceding determination timing, a lottery is performed when it is first determined, and the reaching stage is set based on the lottery result, and the reaching stage is performed. The power storage amount of the power gauge 82c is increased at a long press advancing speed up to the end. Then, when it is determined that the operation information indicates the operation state at the next immediately preceding determination timing, the gauge is advanced to the next reaching stage already set in step S3505 without performing the lottery. Therefore, since the reaching stage is changed by lottery regardless of the gauge progressing pattern, the variety of effects is enhanced, and highly entertaining effects can be performed.

The above-described suggestion effect development processing will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. Figure 80 is operated in the operation accepting lifetime hold _(T2 0 to T3) when the traveling pattern 102 is selected through the operation acceptance lifetime hold _(T2 0 to T3) to the preceding progression pattern determination process (S3142) It is a figure which shows an example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of operation of the button 6 and the production | presentation screen which concerns on the suggestion production 203 according to this. In the example of FIG. 80, four operations of the operation buttons 6 on the operation acceptance lifetime hold (T2 0 _{to T3)} have been made. Each operation is the same as the operation described above with reference to FIG. 76, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

Here, the determination at each of the characteristic immediately preceding determination timings will be mainly described. Between specific time period _T2 0 to T2 _1, when having reached just before determining the timing _{T2 a1} is already underway gauge progress in advancing speed hold, since a gauge progress flag = 2, exits to YES in step S3199 The lottery is not performed, and the increase in the gauge accumulation amount at the long press advancing speed is advanced until the first gauge is reached. In the specific period T2 _{0 to} T2 ₁ , when the immediately preceding determination timing T2 _a2 is reached, the increase in power storage amount is stopped and the gauge progress flag is cleared, so YES in step S3198 → NO in step S3199 → Go with step S3200. When the leading immediately before the determination timing T2 _a2, the operation switch 6 is not a operation state, it passes through the step S3200 to NO, never lottery is performed, an increase in power storage amount in the previous stage of the second gauge It will remain stopped.

During the specific period T2 _{2 to} T2 ₃ , when the immediately preceding determination timing T2 _a3 is reached, the increase in the gauge accumulation amount at the non-long press progressing speed is already advanced, and the gauge progress flag is set to 1 Therefore, the process proceeds from YES in step S3198 → NO in step S3199 → step S3200. When the leading immediately before the determination timing _{T2 a3,} since the operation switch 6 is in the operation state, the process proceeds NO → step S3502 → step S3503 of YES → Step S3501 in step S3200, the drawing is performed, based on the lottery result The arrival stage is set. In this example, the arrival stage is advanced by one step by lottery and set to the fourth gauge. Thereafter, the gauge storage amount is increased at a long press progressing speed to the set fourth gauge, and the display color of the power storage amount is changed to red when reaching. Thereafter, when reaching the timing T2 ₃ is reached step in step S3504 is set in the next step (MAX) irrespective of the gauge progression pattern.

Between specific time period T2 ₃ to T2 _4, when reaches just before determining the timing T2 _a4 is stopped after an increase in the power storage amount is being advanced to the stage immediately before the MAX to reach it, the gauge progress flag is cleared Therefore, the process proceeds from YES in step S3198 → NO in step S3199 → step S3200. When the leading immediately before the determination timing T2 _a4, the operation switch 6 is not a operation state, passes through the step S3200 to NO, never lottery is performed, an increase of the power storage amount is stopped just before the stage of MAX I will stay. Then, during the specific period T2 _{4 to} T3, when the immediately preceding determination timing T3 _a is reached, the increase of the power storage amount at the long press progressing speed has already started, and the gauge progressing flag = 2, so the step Withdrawal from S3199 to YES, the lottery is not performed, the gauge storage amount is increased at a long press progressing speed until reaching the MAX, and the display color of the power storage amount changes to rainbow when it reaches the MAX Be done.

  Further, in the suggestion effect progression process shown in FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, the suggestion effect control unit 74 sets a plurality of long press operation reception effective periods, which are one of the predetermined periods determined based on the effect. When it is determined that the predetermined operation is performed on the operation switch 6 in a specific period between the one timing and the predetermined timing immediately before the one timing at one of the timings of The same processing as in the case where the predetermined operation is performed at the timing before the one timing is performed, but the "gauge step skip lottery" may be performed also when it is determined that the predetermined operation is performed. .

  The flowcharts of FIGS. 81 and 82 show another example in which the processing procedure of FIG. 71 is changed from such a viewpoint. Here, the flowchart of FIG. 70 has the same processing procedure in this improved example. Hereinafter, in the flowcharts of FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, the steps relating to the same processes as the steps of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the suggestion effect control unit 74 performs a predetermined operation on the operation switch 6 in the specific period, that is, when a long press operation is performed here (YES in step S3161 of FIG. 70 or In step S3162, it is determined whether there is an effect that has not been reached (step S3511). If there is an effect that has not been reached (YES in step S3511), it is determined whether a lottery has already been made (step S 3512). Here, it is determined whether or not the lottery has already been made, after the lottery is performed in one period of a plurality of specific periods set within the long press operation reception valid period, avoiding that the process becomes complicated In order to avoid this, the re-lottery is not made in the subsequent specific period. If the suggestion effect control unit 74 does not draw the lottery (NO in step S 3512), the lottery is performed (step S 3513), and the arrival stage is set based on the result of the lottery (step S 3514). A command instructing an increase in the power storage amount at the long press advancing speed is set in the transmission buffer (step S3167). On the other hand, if there is no effect that has not been reached (NO in step S3511) or if the lottery has already been made (YES in step S3512), steps S3513 and S3514 are skipped and the process moves to step S3167. The subsequent processes are basically as described above with reference to FIG. 71. However, if it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed in the next specific period, the process proceeds to the next reaching stage which has already been set without performing the lottery. This is different from the processing described with reference to FIG. 71 in that the gauge is advanced (step S3515).

  According to such processing, when it is determined that the predetermined operation is performed on the operation switch 6 in the specific period between the one determination timing and the predetermined start timing immediately before the one determination timing, When there is an effect that has not been reached, a lottery is performed, the arrival stage is set based on the lottery result, the gauge is advanced at a long press speed leading to the arrival stage, and the display color of the power storage amount is changed. Become. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed in the next specific period, since the lottery has already been made, the gauge is advanced to the next reaching stage already set in step S3515 without performing the lottery, and the power accumulation amount Will change the display color of.

For example, in certain period from the start timing T2 ₀ until the determination timing T2 ₁ long press operation is performed after changing the display color of the power storage amount in the blue with the progress of the gauge to the first gauge, determined from the determination timing T2 ₁ is not the long press operation in a specified period from the timing T2 _2, when the long press operation is a specific time period from the subsequent determination timing T2 ₂ until the determination timing T2 _3, predetermined lottery is performed, the arrival phase first The indicator color of the power storage amount is set to yellow or more for two or more gauges, and gauge progress is performed at a long press speed to reach the reaching stage. When the long press operation at a particular period from the subsequent determination timing T2 ₃ until the determination timing T2 ₄ is, since already finished lottery, lottery is not performed, gauge the progress of long press speed to reach the next arrival phase To change the display color of the power storage amount. Therefore, since the reaching stage is changed by lottery regardless of the gauge progressing pattern, the variety of effects is enhanced, and highly entertaining effects can be performed.

The above-described suggestion effect progression processing will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. Figure 83 is a long press operation accepting validity period _(T2 0 to T3) progression pattern determination process prior to the long press operation acceptance lifetime when the traveling pattern 102 has been selected (Step S3142) _(T2 0 ~T3) in the It is a figure which shows an example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of the production | presentation screen which concerns on operation of the operation button 6, and the suggestion effect 203 according to this. In the example of FIG. 83, five of the operation of the operation button 6 to the operation accepting lifetime hold (T2 0 _{to T3)} have been made. The first and second operation is the same as the operation explained in FIG. 72 above, after the second operation, a continuous operation time regarded as long-pressing operation between the timing T2 ₃ timing T2 ₄ This is different from the operation described in FIG. 72 in that the third operation is performed.

Here, FIG. 70, FIG. 81, and also with reference appropriate flowchart in FIG. 82, the following description centers on characteristic features of processing performed between timings _T2 3 to T2 ₄ shown in FIG. 83. When the third operation is performed, YES in step S3155 is continued until the predetermined time (a time which is 1/10 of the long press operation valid period) which is considered as the long press operation after the third operation is considered to be a long press operation. The process of NO in step S3156 → NO in step S3157 → YES in step S3160 → NO in step S3161 → NO in step S3162 → NO in step S3163 → NO in step S3169 → NO in step S3174 → step S3155 is repeated. Then, if the continuation operation time after the third operation reaches a predetermined time considered to be a long press operation, YES in step S3162 → YES in step S3511 → NO in step S3512 → step S3513 → step S3514 and the lottery is reached by lottery Is set. In this example, the reaching stage set for the fourth gauge is set to MAX based on the result of the lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step S3167, and the increase of the power storage amount at the long press advancing speed up to MAX is started. As a result, the power storage amount of the power gauge to time point T2 ₄ reaches the MAX, the display color of the power storage amount is varied in rainbow colors.

Here, “progress in gauge progress at long press progression speed” (step S3167) of the suggestion effect progression process of FIG. 81 includes changing to a non-reaching effect mode by shortening the time. That is, when it is determined that the predetermined long press operation is performed at one of a plurality of timings, there is an unattained effect mode that has not been executed at another timing before the one timing. It may be changed to an unattained presentation mode by shortening the time. For example, a long press operation at a specific period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ is, after changing the display color of the power storage amount in the blue with allowed to proceed to the first gauge, followed by a specified period of time T2 ₁ to T2 ₂ , specified period of time _T2 2 to T2 _3, not the long press operation in certain time period from the timing T2 ₃ to timing T2 _4, when it is again long press operation at a particular period from the subsequent timing T2 ₄ until time T3 The gauge step skip lottery may be performed, the reaching step may be MAX, the display color of the power storage amount may be set to rainbow color, and the gauge may be advanced at a long press speed to reach the reaching step. In this case, as the gauge the progress of long press speed when it is long press operation at a particular period from the timing T2 ₄ until time T3 is, the second gauge → third gauge → shortened fourth gauge → MAX and the gauge time The presentation mode may be changed so that the display color of the power storage amount becomes green → yellow → red → rainbow when it is advanced while reaching each gauge. Such an effect is suitable as an indication when the result of the special game determination is to shift to the special game state ST2.

In addition, “progress in gauge at a long press progression speed” (step S3167) in the suggestion effect development process of FIG. 81 includes performing an effect that does not change to an unreached effect mode. That is, when a predetermined long press operation is performed at one of a plurality of timings, if there is an unreached effect aspect that has not been executed at other timings before the one timing, the non-reached You may perform the presentation which is not changed to the presentation mode of. For example, a long press operation at a specific period from the timing T2 ₀ to timing T2 ₁ is, after changing the display color of the power storage amount in the blue with the progress of the gauge to the first gauge, the timing T2 ₂ from subsequent time T2 ₁ in certain period until not the long press operation, if it is long pressed in the subsequent specified period of time T2 ₂ to T2 _3, the display color of the power storage amount in the yellow allowed to proceed to the third gauge would otherwise As for the change point, the progress color to the second gauge and the display color of the power storage amount may be set to green as the arrival stage, and the gauge progression at the long push speed may be performed to reach the arrival stage. Then, it followed if long press operation at a particular period from the timing T2 ₄ until time T3 is, performs gauge step skip lottery, set the arrival phase fourth gauge and higher, the display color of the power storage amount in the above red, An increase in power storage considerations at a long push speed to reach the reaching stage may be advanced. That is, until the timing T2 ₄ suppresses the progress of the gauge, it is possible to perform an effect such that recover it when the long press operation at a specific period until the timing T3 has been. Such an effect is suitable as an indication that indicates that the result of the special game determination is not to shift to the special game state ST2.

  In the present embodiment, the operation button 6 having the movable body 6a has been described as an example, but in place of the operation button 6 or the movable body 6a, a lever, a handle, a grip, a rotation member, a slide member, a touch panel An optical sensor or the like may be used as the operation member.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a so-called pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines such as a so-called pachislot gaming machine.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control board 33 advances the scenario effect based on the change start command transmitted from the main control board 30, but the special game start command (big hit start command), customer wait demo command, etc. Scenario presentation may be advanced based on other types of commands. In this case, the determination of the long press operation, the single hit operation, and the continuous hit operation based on the operation signal of the operation means in the progress of the scenario effect may be performed as in the above embodiment.

  Further, among the plurality of timings set in the long press operation acceptance effective period described above, the number of specific periods whose start point and end point are determined by successive timings is limited to 5 if it is 2 or more. There is no. Further, the lengths of the plurality of specific periods do not necessarily have to be equal for all the specific periods, and all or some of the lengths of the plurality of specific periods may be different. Furthermore, the plurality of timings set in the long press operation reception effective period and the like may be variable, such as setting the timing when the operation button is operated by the player as the initial timing, in addition to setting in advance.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 game machine 6 operation button 8 speaker 9 frame lamp 14 movable character 14a board lamp 12 image display 13 sub-display 30 main control board 31 sub control board 33 effect control board 33 a CPU
33c RAM
36 effect device 50 game control unit 52 special game determination unit 65 effect control unit 66 operation control unit 67 reception buffer 68 transmission buffer 69 operation signal storage unit 69a sampling signal storage unit 69b edge storage unit 69c on edge count number storage unit 69d on signal Count number storage unit
70 effect pattern determination unit 71 normal game control unit 73 scenario progress effect control unit 74 suggestion effect control unit 75 first stage effect control unit 76 second stage effect control unit

Claims (1)

A main control unit that controls the progress of the game and transmits a command according to the progress of the game;
An effect control unit that determines an effect based on a command transmitted from the main control unit and causes the effect device to execute the determined effect;
Operation means capable of being operated by the player and detecting an operation situation regarding the operation by the player;
An operation control unit configured to process the operation status detected from the operation unit as operation information;
The effect control unit
And a processing means for processing the operation information in association with an operation time when the operation information indicates that the operation means is operated by the player.
An edge storage unit that stores, as the operation information, at least information indicating whether the operation unit has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, and an on signal that stores information associated with the time during which the operation unit is continuously operated It has a count number storage unit,
Within a predetermined period determined based on the effect, the operation information indicates a first operation in which the operation means is operated continuously for a predetermined time or more, and continuously for less than the predetermined time At least it can be determined that the operating means is indicative of a second operation to be operated,
A second operation that determines whether or not the first operation acceptance valid period is within the predetermined period, and whether or not the second operation is performed. The operation information in the edge storage unit and in the on signal count number storage unit can be updated at each sampling timing with a constant interval regardless of whether it is within the acceptance valid period,
If the operation information in said first operation accepting validity period is determined to show a first operation, and produce as the first operation is performed,
Even if the operation information indicates that the operation means is operated at the start of the second operation acceptance valid period, the first operation is performed and the second operation is performed Without performing any of the effects that the
Even if the operation information does not indicate the first operation in the first operation acceptance valid period, the total operation time of the operation means in the first operation acceptance valid period is a predetermined time. A game machine characterized by performing an effect that the first operation is performed in the case of being above .